Bmw 2010 X5 Xdrive30I Owners Manual

Bmw-2010-X5-X5M-X6-And-X6M-Owners-Manual-761992 bmw-2010-x5-x5m-x6-and-x6m-owners-manual-761992

2010-x5mx6mseries 2010-x5mx6mseries

2015-04-13

: Bmw Bmw-2010-X5-Xdrive30I-Owners-Manual-694547 bmw-2010-x5-xdrive30i-owners-manual-694547 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 300 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 1 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Contents
A - Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 2 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
X5 xDrive30i
X5 xDrive48i
X5 xDrive35d
X6 xDrive 35i
X6 xDrive 50i
X5 M
X6 M
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 1 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/09, 09 07 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 2 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 279.
Using this Owner's Manual
4Notes
7Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
43 Adjusting
55 Transporting children safely
59 Driving
71 Everything under control
82 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
102 Lamps
107 Climate
115 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
130 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
140 Navigation system
141 Destination entry
150 Destination guidance
157 What to do if …
Entertainment
160 On/off and tone
163 Radio
166 Satellite radio
171 CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
178 Music collection
183 External devices
187 DVD system in rear
Communications
202 Telephone
213 Contacts
215 BMW Assist
Mobility
224 Refueling
229 Wheels and tires
239 Under the hood
244 Maintenance
246 Care
250 Replacing components
261 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
268 Technical data
273 Short commands of voice activation
system
279 Everything from A to Z
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 3 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
About this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
If you have additional questions, your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center is always happy
to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech-
nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
<Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet avail-
able at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 4 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-
responding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment
such as CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios, or sim-
ilar accessories may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. Refer to
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center for
additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 5 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Notes
6
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
>New Vehicle Limited Warranty
>Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
>Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
>Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
>California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 6 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 7 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 8 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available
for operating the various systems.
At a glance
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 9 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1Rear window safety switch 38
2Opening and closing windows 37
3Folding exterior mirrors in and out*52
4Adjusting exterior mirrors 52
Automatic curb monitor*53
5Instrument lighting 105
Fog lamps 105*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 10 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
9BMW X6: upshifting or downshifting
with automatic transmission 65
10 Instrument panel 12
13 Ignition lock 59
14 Buttons on steering wheel
15 Horn, entire surface
18 Releasing hood 239
6Parking lamps 102
Low beams 102
Automatic headlamp control*102
Adaptive Head Light*103
High-beam assistant*104
7Head-Up Display*100
8Turn signals 67
High beams, headlamp flasher 67
High-beam assistant*104
Roadside parking lamps*104
Time, date, outside temperature,
Check Control 71, 78
Computer 73
11 Windshield wipers 67
Rain sensor 68
BMW X5: rear window wiper 68
12 Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 59
Telephone*:
Accepting and ending calls, start
dialing* selected phone number,
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system* 22
Changing the radio station
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated-air mode, 110
Steering wheel heating*54
16 Steering wheel adjustment 53
17 Cruise control*69
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 11 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument panel
1Indicator lamps for turn signals
2Speedometer
3Indicator and warning lamps 13
4Tachometer 72
5BMW X5: energy control 72
BMW X6: engine oil temperature 72 or
energy control 72
6Display for
>Clock/date 71
>Outside temperature 71
>Indicator and warning lamps 77
>Speed of cruise control*69
>BMW X5: reserve display for diesel
exhaust fluid 226
7Display for
>Odometer and trip odometer 71
>Computer 73
>Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 74
>Automatic transmission positions 64
>HDC Hill Descent Control 90
>High-beam assistant*104
> There is a Check Control
message 77
>Adaptive Drive*91
8Fuel gauge 73
9Resetting trip odometer 71
Displaying service requirement 71
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 12 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a
malfunction and on the corresponding need to
take action can be displayed via the Check Con-
trol, refer to page 77.
In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor-
mation is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps indicate that cer-
tain functions are activated:
With parking brake set 61
With parking brake set for Canadian
models
Fog lamps 105*
High beams/headlamp flasher 104
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 89
Exhaust-gas values 245
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 13 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 14 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1Microphone for hands-free mode for
telephone* and for voice activation
system*22
2Initiating an emergency request 261
3Reading lamps 106
4Glass sunroof 38, 40
5Interior lamps 106
6Passenger airbag status lamp 98
7Control Display 16
Displays for menu navigation
8Hazard warning flashers
9Central locking system 27
10 Opening glove compartment 118
11 Automatic climate control with 2-zone
control 108
Automatic climate control with 4-zone
control*112
12 Changing
>radio station 160
>track 160
13 Selecting radio, CD and CD/DVD changer*
14 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
17 Buttons on the controller 17
Selecting menus directly
18 Automatic Hold 61
19 Parking brake 61
20 Adaptive Drive*91
21 Programmable memory buttons 20
22 Switching Entertainment sound output on/
off and adjusting volume 160
23 Ejecting audio CD
Manual air distribution 110
Automatic air distribution and
volume 108
Cooling function 110
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 110
Maximum cooling 110
Air volume 109
Residual heat utilization 110
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 109
Rear window defroster 109
Seat heating*50
Active seat ventilation*51
15 Opening liftgate 30, 33
Active seat*52
PDC Park Distance Control*82
Top View*84
rear view camera*86
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 89
HDC Hill Descent Control 90
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 15 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func-
tions is described in connection with the rele-
vant equipment.
Controls
1Control Display
2Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
>Move in four directions, arrow 3
>Turn, arrow 4
>Push, arrow 5
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 16 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Buttons on the controller
Operating principle
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be accessed via the
main menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g. "Set-
tings".
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
Button Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Open the Navigation menu
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Display the previous menu
OPTION Opening the Options menu
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 17 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
iDrive
18
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional windows can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
>Screen settings, refer to page 19.
>Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or set-
tings can be selected that are currently not vis-
ible.<
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 18 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
1Time
2Display for:
>Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
>Incoming, outgoing or missed call
>SMS* received
3Display for:
>Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*
>Telephone*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins*:
>"TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
>No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
during inputs using the voice activation sys-
tem*.
Switching Control Display
off/on
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off Control display"
To switch on, press the controller.
Split screen view, Split screen*
Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the split
screen.
On the split screen, this information remains
visible even when you change to another menu.
Switching split screen view on and off*
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Selecting display for split screen
content*
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 19 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Programmable memory
buttons
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button ... for
longer than two seconds.
Sample use of programmable memory
buttons
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. Press the desired button ... for
longer than two seconds.
Running function
Press button ... .
The function is run immediately. This means,
for example, that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying button assignment
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
Displaying short info
Touch button ... .
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Displaying detailed information
Touch button ... for an extended
period.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 20 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
>The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
>Town/city names can be entered with the
spelling used in any of the languages avail-
able on the Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 21 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice activation system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Using iDrive, set the language that applies for
the voice activation system in order to enable
identification of the spoken commands. To set
the language of iDrive, refer to page 81.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
activation system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis-
play.
To have the available commands read aloud:
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com-
mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.
Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected, refer to page 273.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
{Voice commands}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 22 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbrevi-
ated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
>"Default"
>"Short"
Notes
To operate the phone by voice, refer to
page 209.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
>Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
>Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphases and pauses. This also applies
when spelling out and saying a full word
during destination entry.
>When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
>For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbrevia-
tions.
>Keep doors, windows, and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof* closed in order to
avoid unpleasant outside noise.
>Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{C D track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 23 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 24 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 25 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access*, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 37.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 244.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
>Driver's door, refer to page 29
>Floor panel flap in cargo bay, refer to
page 124
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls,
for two with comfort access*.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
>Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 28
>Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
>Displays on Control Display:
>Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 80
>Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 80
>Language on Control Display, refer to
page 81
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 26 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
27
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>12h/24h clock format, refer to page 80
>Date format, refer to page 80
>Lighting settings:
>Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 67
>Welcome lamps, refer to page 102
>Pathway lighting, refer to page 103
>Daytime driving lamps*, refer to
page 103
>High-beam assistant*, refer to page 104
>PDC Park Distance Control*: optical warn-
ing, refer to page 83
>Top View*: optical warning, refer to
page 85
>Rear view camera*:
>Selecting functions, refer to page 86
>Type of display, refer to page 87
>Head-Up Display*: selection, brightness
and position of display, refer to page 100
>Automatic climate control: AUTO program
and intensity, cooling function, and auto-
matic recirculated-air control/recirculated-
air mode, temperature, air distribution, ven-
tilation temperature, starting on page 108
>Programmable memory buttons: selecting
stored functions, refer to page 20
>Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel*, refer to page 45
>Adaptive Drive*: selected chassis and sus-
pension tuning, refer to page 91
>Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 160
>Radio:
>Display of stored stations, refer to
page 165
>Switching RDS Radio Data System on/
off*, refer to page 164
>Phone: volume setting, refer to
pages 205,210
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
>Doors
>liftgate
>Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
>using the remote control
>using the door lock
>with comfort access* using the door han-
dles
The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are
also switched on and off with the remote con-
trol. The alarm system is armed/disarmed at the
same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system on page 34.
Operating from inside
Using the button for central locking, refer to
page 30. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In an accident of sufficient severity, the central
locking system automatically unlocks the vehi-
cle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and
interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside.
Always take along the remote control when
leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then
be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
This unlocks the vehicle.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 27 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Setting unlocking behavior
You can set whether the first press of the button
unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehi-
cle.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
>"All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
>"Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Comfort opening
Press and hold the button. The windows and
the glass sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof*
are opened.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switch off alarm: press any button.
Unlocking liftgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The liftgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A
previously locked liftgate is also locked again
after closing.<
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi-
cle is switched on.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 28 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle using the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 26.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
>This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
>this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the liftgate.
Convenience operation
You can use the door lock to operate the win-
dows and the glass sunroof*/panorama glass
sunroof*.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Rotating the
key back into the initial position stops the
movement.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 29 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the liftgate, with the front doors closed. It does
not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler
door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the
vehicle is locked.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
>"Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle after a short time, unless a door
has been opened.
>"Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle when you drive away.
The function is switched on and is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening
>Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
>pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
>Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
>press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
BMW X5: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 30 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Opening from inside
Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the liftgate or the button
on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
The liftgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. From the cargo bay, press out the handle in
the liftgate, refer to arrow, with a screw-
driver and pull. The liftgate is unlocked.
2. Open the liftgate and press in the handle.
The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
liftgate make it easier to pull down.
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Automatic liftgate operation*
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Other-
wise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired open-
ing height is selected.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 31 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Opening liftgate
The liftgate opens automatically when you:
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
>Press the button in the center console.
>Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
To stop the opening process:
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
>Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
>Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
>Press the button in the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<
Closing liftgate
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
Function requirement:
The tailgate is closed.
The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
>Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical defect of the automatic
liftgate operation function:
1. Manually release the liftgate, refer to
page 31.
2. Open or close the liftgate slowly and with-
out making sudden movements.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 32 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW X5: tailgate
Opening
Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward.
The open tailgate can support loads of up
to 550 lbs./250 kg.<
Closing
Fold the tailgate up and press closed.
BMW X6: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Other-
wise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired open-
ing height is selected.
Opening liftgate
The liftgate opens automatically when you:
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
>Press the button in the center console.
>Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
To stop the opening process:
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
>Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
>Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
>Press the button in the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 33 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Closing liftgate
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
>Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
>Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
The liftgate also closes automatically
without pressing the button if it is loaded
with an additional weight of approx. 11 lbs./5 kg,
e.g. snow or ice.<
Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. Push out cover 1 on the liftgate with a
screwdriver.
2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Open or close the liftgate slowly and with-
out making sudden movements.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
>When a door, the hood, or the liftgate is
opened
>To movements in the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
>To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
>To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
>with an acoustic alarm
>by switching on the hazard warning flashers
>by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
With the system armed, the liftgate can also be
opened using the button of the remote con-
trol, refer to page 28. When the liftgate is
closed, it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
>Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 27.
>Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 34 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator lamp displays
>The indicator lamp under the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
>The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood, or liftgate are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec-
onds. However, the interior motion sensor
is not activated.
>The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
>The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof* must be completely
closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
>In stacking garages
>When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
>When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func-
tions:
>Unlocking/locking vehicle
>Comfort closing
>Opening liftgate
>Starting engine
Functional requirements
>The vehicle can only be unlocked if the
vehicle detects that the remote control car-
ried is not located in the vehicle interior.
>The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 35 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
>The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 26
beforehand.
The special features when using comfort
access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sun-
roof*/panorama glass sunroof*, the system
checks whether a remote control is located in
the vehicle. Please repeat opening or closing if
necessary.<
Releasing
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the area highlighted in the picture,
arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Please make sure that all electronic sys-
tems/consumers are switched off before
locking to save the battery.<
Comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of a hand on the sur-
face, arrow 2.
The windows and the glass sunroof*/panorama
glass sunroof* are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle immediately stops
the closing process.<
Opening liftgate
Press the button on the liftgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi-
cle after the liftgate is closed, then the liftgate
opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash
and a signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 59.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal, otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
As long as no remote control is detected in the
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off
if no door has been opened.
Switching off engine
>Remote control not in ignition lock:
After switching off the engine, the transmis-
sion is automatically switched into trans-
mission position P.
>Remote control in ignition lock:
If transmission position N is engaged, the
transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 36 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when an attempt is
made to start the engine: starting the
engine is not possible. The remote control is
not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take
along the remote control into the vehicle or
have it checked. Insert another remote control
into the ignition lock if necessary.
The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer in the vehicle. After switching off the
engine, the engine can only be started again
within approx. 10 seconds if no door has been
opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery of the remote control.
Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 26.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Dispose of used batteries at a collection
point or at your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
>Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
>Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 37 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 28 or 29.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will stop
moving the window prior to lowering it again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
BMW X5: panorama glass
sunroof*
The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera-
tion with the ignition switched on, refer to
page 59.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass sunroof and
keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 38 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Raising, opening, closing
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed sunroof is raised and the sliding
visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
Sliding visor
You can move the sliding visor independently
with the sunroof closed or raised.
>Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The sliding visor opens as long as you keep
the switch in this position.
>Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The sliding visor will open automatically.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the
motion.
You can close the sliding visor in a similar man-
ner by sliding the switch forwards.
Panorama glass sunroof
With the sliding visor open, proceed as
described under Sliding visor.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 28 or 29.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.
Opening and closing sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point twice consecutively.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort mode
>Press the switch twice with the sunroof
open:
The sunroof is raised.
>When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch twice in the opening direction:
The sunroof is opened all the way.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the sunroof is not com-
pletely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com-
pletely opened or closed, it stops in the comfort
position. If desired, continue the motion follow-
ing this with the switch.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor
encounter resistance when closing from
roughly one third of the sunroof opening or
when closing from the raised position, the clos-
ing action is interrupted and the panorama
glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 39 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work carried out by your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.
3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.
4. Insert the Allen wrench* from the onboard
tool kit, refer to page 250, into the opening
provided. Move the panorama glass sunroof
in the desired direction.
5. Reconnect the plug.
6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel,
arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward
until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.
BMW X6: glass sunroof*,
electric
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
the ignition is switched on, refer to page 59.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 40 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
>Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you continue to hold the
switch in this position.
>Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly pressing the switch
stops the motion.
You can close the glass sunroof in a similar
manner by sliding the switch forward. The slid-
ing visor remains open and can be closed by
hand.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion with the remote control or at the door lock,
refer to page 28 or 29.
For information on convenience closing with
comfort access, refer to page 36.
Automatic opening and closing
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The following movements are also automatic:
>With the sunroof open, press the switch:
The sunroof is opened all the way.
>With the sunroof raised, briefly press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the sunroof is not com-
pletely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
you wish, you can continue the motion by actu-
ating the switch.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof meets with resistance from
about the middle of the roof opening when clos-
ing or when lowering from the raised position,
the closing process is interrupted and the glass
sunroof opens all the way.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
When there is danger outside the vehicle, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Slide the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it there. The pinch protection
system is limited and the sunroof opens
slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain
value.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 41 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch
forward again beyond the resistance point
and hold it there. The roof closes without
the pinch protection system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work carried out by your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.
3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.
4. Take the Allen wrench* from its bracket in
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 250, and
insert it into the opening provided. Move the
glass sunroof in the desired direction.
5. Reconnect the plug.
6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel,
arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward
until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 42 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the fol-
lowing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 55.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
cluster, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag, otherwise
injuries can occur when the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 98.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd
row seats* into the top position.
Head restraints, refer to page 46.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
BMW X5: depending on its equipment, your
vehicle has either five or seven seats, which are
all provided with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-
sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 43 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
44
the upper body area periodically to readjust the
tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the
restraint of the safety belt.
If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the
larger backrest half must be locked, refer to
page 124, otherwise the center safety belt has
no restraining action.<
Safety belts, refer to page 49.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust or calibrate your
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat
could respond with unexpected movement, and
the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
Never adjust manually adjustable seats while
the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the restrain-
ing effect of these seats during accidents could
be reduced.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-
vided by the belt.<
Also observe the information on damage to
safety belts on page 50 and on the height of the
head restraints on page 46.
Adjusting manually*
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
Pull the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position. After you release the lever, move the
seat forward or backward slightly so that it
engages fully.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
Adjusting electrically
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
1Longitudinal direction
2Height
3Seat tilt
4Backrest
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 44 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Differs depending on seat:
1Backrest
2Height
Additional depending on seat:
1Backrest width*
2Shoulder support*
3Thigh support*
4Lumbar support*
Backrest width*
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.
Shoulder support*
This also supports the back in the shoulder
area, provides a relaxed sitting position and
helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
>Increase or decrease curvature: press front
or rear section of switch.
>Shift curvature up or down: press upper or
lower section of switch.
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory*
You can store and retrieve two different driver's
seat and front passenger seat*-, exterior mir-
ror-, and steering wheel positions*.
The adjustment of the backrest width and lum-
bar support is not stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 59.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 45 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
46
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
The positions of the driver's seat, the exte-
rior mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Activating
Do not activate the memory function
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. After unlocking, open the driver's door or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is canceled if you
briefly press a seat-adjusting switch or one of
the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Activating with the remote control
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is canceled if you
briefly press a seat-adjusting switch or one of
the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic activation
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The function for automatically recalling the
last seat position is switched on and is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Deactivating automatic recall
Deactivate "Last seat position automatic".
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if the
respective seat is not occupied. Reinstall the
head restraints before transporting passen-
gers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot
provide its protective function.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 46 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Other-
wise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injury-
reducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
work carried out only at a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise,
correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Removal and installation of the front head
restraints should be performed by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Front seats: height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the head restraints
electrically.
Front seats: adjusting distance from
back of head
>Forward: pull up.
>Back: press the button and slide the head-
rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Comfort seat*
You can adjust the distance from the back of the
seat occupant's head using the shoulder sup-
port, refer to page 45.
Adjusting side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 47 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats*,
adjusting height
>To raise: pull up.
>To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.
In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the
height of the middle head restraint is not adjust-
able.
Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
BMW X5: rear seats
2nd row seats [Second row seats]
With a divided* row of seats you can adjust
both sides individually.
Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the
vehicle is moving, as otherwise the pas-
sengers on the 3rd row seats could be injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd
row seats engage properly. Otherwise the
restraining effect of the safety belts during an
accident could be reduced.<
Longitudinal direction*
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the
desired position.
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest*
The backrests can be adjusted in four steps.
Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove
weight from the backrest as needed.
Access to 3rd row seats*
Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.
The handle recess on the interior trim of
the door pillar makes climbing in easier.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 48 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
When folding back the 2nd row seats,
make sure that the footwell under the
2nd row seats is clear. Otherwise persons in the
3rd row seats could be injured or objects dam-
aged.<
Warning lamp for 2nd row seats:
lights up when the 2nd row seats are
not locked. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
3rd row seats*
The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space
for two persons.
Folding up backrest
Before folding the seats up, remove the roll-up
cover, refer to page 122, and if need be, slide
the 2nd row seats slightly forward.
1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is
unlocked.
2. Fold up and engage the backrest.
Make sure that the catch engages
securely. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the passen-
ger compartment during braking or evasive
maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-
pants.<
3. Push the head restraints into the top posi-
tion.
Folding backrest down
1. Push down the head restraint, refer to
page 48.
2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests
are released.
3. Fold the backrest down.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 49 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. A message also
appears on the Control Display.
Please check whether the safety belt is cor-
rectly fastened.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 44.
BMW X5: the two rear safety belt buckles inte-
grated into the rear seat are for passengers sit-
ting on the left and right. The belt buckle
embossed with the word CENTER is intended
exclusively for use by passengers riding in the
center position.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any
child restraint devices, and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Otherwise correct operation of this
safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
Belt-force limiter
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the
driver's seat is dependent on the position of the
driver's seat.
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this
function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a
corresponding message is displayed on the
Control Display.
Calibrating driver's seat
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage also appears on the Control Dis-
play. Please calibrate the driver's
seat.
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It
briefly moves toward the front in the pro-
cess.
3. Set the desired seating position again.
The calibration is completed when the message
on the Control Display disappears. Should this
message continue to be displayed, repeat the
calibration. If the message does not disappear
even after repeated calibration, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
Never carry out calibration while the vehi-
cle is moving, as this can cause accidents.
Make sure that no persons or objects become
wedged during the calibration process, as this
can cause injuries or damage.<
Seat heating*
Front
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press the button longer.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat-
tery. The LEDs remain lit.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 50 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution.
Active seat ventilation* and
seat heating*
Front
1Seat heating
2Active seat ventilation
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the
temperature or ventilation position. The LED in
the respective button lights up.
The temperature and ventilation levels are dis-
played in bar form on the Control Display. A dis-
play of three bars indicates the highest level of
seat heating or seat ventilation.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the
ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: press button 1 or 2 longer.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1. Press the button 1.
2. Select "Seat heating distribution" and
press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1. Press button 1.
2. Select "Seat heating distribution" and
press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Heated rear seats
Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution, refer to page 50.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 51 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
52
Active seat*
The seat cushion is actively varied by alter-
nately raising and lowering the right and left half
of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten-
sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back
pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
The action of the system is reduced and if need
be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up
to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
accident.<
1Adjusting
2Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3Folding mirrors in and out*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 45.
Adjusting manually
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold the mirrors
in and out again up to a speed of approx.
12 mph/20 km/h. This is advantageous, for
example, in car washes, narrow streets or for
bringing mirrors that have been manually folded
in back into the correct position.
Folded in mirrors fold out again at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 52 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage transmission position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi-
cles at night, turn the knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the interior rearview mirror, one on the front and
one on the back.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
Manual adjustment*
1. Flip the lever down.
2. Adapt the longitudinal direction and height
of the steering wheel to the seat position.
3. Return the lever back to its locked position.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 53 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
54
Power adjustment*
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 45.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is switched on,
the LED in the button lights up.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 54 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported on the 2nd row seats in child
restraint devices which correspond to the age,
weight and height of the child. Otherwise there
is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
device can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint device on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags on the passen-
ger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury for the child if the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
device.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 98.
Installing child restraint
devices
Follow the child restraint device manufac-
turer's instructions for selection, installa-
tion, and use of child restraint devices. Other-
wise, the degree of protection may be
reduced.<
BMW X5: for equipment with 3rd row
seats*, make sure that the seat of the 2nd
row seats on which the child restraint device is
mounted is properly locked. Otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury for the child in an
accident.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection pro-
vided by these child restraint devices may be
reduced.<
BMW X5: before mounting a child restraint
device in the center seat of the 2nd row seats,
move the outer seat cushions and backrests
into the rearmost positions.
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint device on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint device, move
the passenger seat into the furthest back and
highest* position in order to achieve the best
possible safety belt position. Do not change the
seat position after this.
Backrest width*
The backrest width adjustment of the
front passenger seat must be completely
open. After installing the child's seat, no mem-
ory position may be called up; otherwise, the
stability of the child's seat on the front passen-
ger seat is reduced.<
1. Open backrest width adjustment com-
pletely, refer to page 45.
2. Install child's seat.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 55 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
56
Child seat security
The rear safety belts
>BMW X5: all safety belts of the 2nd and
3rd* row seats
>BMW X6: all safety belts of the 2nd row
seats
and the safety belt for the front passenger can
be locked to prevent extension in order to per-
mit attachment of child restraint devices.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint device with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint device.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint device.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint devices; otherwise, their
protective function may be reduced.<
Before attaching the child's seat, pull the belt
away from the region of the child restraint fixing
system.
Make sure that the LATCH mounts have
properly clicked into place and that the
child restraint device is resting snugly against
the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action
may be reduced.<
The mounts for the LATCH anchors are located
at the points indicated by the arrows.
Child restraint device with tether strap
Only use the top tether mounting points
to secure child restraint devices, other-
wise the mounting points could be damaged.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats in the BMW X5; otherwise the
protection provided by these child restraint
devices may be reduced.<
BMW X5
There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint devices with a tether strap on the
2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out before
using the center mounting point.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 56 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW X6
For child restraint devices with tether strap,
there are two additional attachment points on
the back of the rear seat backrests, refer to
arrows.
Placement of tether strap
Make sure that the tether strap is not
routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the attachment point; other-
wise, the belt cannot properly secure the child
restraint device in the event of an accident.<
BMW X5
1Direction of travel
2Head restraint
3Tether strap hook
4Mounting point
5Backrest
6Tether strap of child restraint device
When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the backrest of
the 2nd row seats and the cargo bay cover.
BMW X6
1Direction of travel
2Head restraint
3Tether strap hook
4Mounting point
5Backrest
6Tether strap of child restraint device
When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the rear seat
backrest and the cargo bay cover.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 57 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
58
Attaching tether strap to the backrest
of the 2nd row seats
BMW X5:
On outer seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
On the center seat when equipped with two
rows of seats:
1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening
in the center armrest.
3. Fold back and engage the center armrest.
4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
On the center seat when equipped with three
rows of seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
BMW X6:
1. Route tether strap over the middle of the
head restraint.
2. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
3. Pull tether strap taut until it compresses the
cushion of the head restraint, thus prevent-
ing the tether strap from sliding off.
On trips
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
the door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 38, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 58 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic
systems/consumers are ready for operation.
Comfort access*
With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 35.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Pressing the Start/Stop button with the
brake pedal depressed starts the
engine.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The time and outside tempera-
ture are displayed in the instrument panel.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
>when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
>with comfort access* by touching the sen-
sitive surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument panel, refer to
page 71.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator lamps, warning lamps, and displays
in the instrument panel go out.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 59 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
60
The ignition switches off automatically* if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the start/stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:
>the brakes are actuated
>the low beams are switched on
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
engage transmission position N or P and set the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
The engine starts when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 35.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag-
ing the starter for a certain period and automat-
ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
Diesel engine
When the engine is cold and at temperatures
below approx. 327/06 the starting process
may be somewhat delayed due to automatic
preglowing. The preglowing indicator lamp in
the instrument panel lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Switching off engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth-
erwise, the vehicle could roll.<
Procedure
1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stationary.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 59.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. With comfort access*: insert the remote
control into the ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake or deactivate
Automatic Hold.
5. Switch off the engine.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 60 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transmission position P will be engaged:
>automatically after approx. 30 minutes
>if you remove the remote control from the
ignition lock
Parking brake
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan-
ical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
You can use the parking brake in two ways:
>manually, by pulling and pushing the button
>automatically, by activating Automatic
Hold, refer to page 61
With the engine stopped, the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels via an electromechanical
system. When the engine is running, the park-
ing brake acts on the disk brakes of the front
and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.
Setting manually
Pull button. The parking brake is set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red. The parking brake is
set.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The remote control does not have to be
inserted into the ignition lock for the parking
brake to be set.
While driving
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to set the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, pull on the button longer.
The vehicle continues to brake forcefully for as
long as you pull on the button.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red, a chime sounds and
the brake lamps light up.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a
stop, i.e., down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/
3 km/h or below, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing manually
Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<
Automatic Hold
The concept
This function assists you as you drive by auto-
matically setting and releasing the parking
brake, e.g. when you are stopped at a traffic sig-
nal or in stop-and-go traffic.
When Automatic Hold is activated, the vehicle is
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 61 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
62
automatically held in place when standing.
When driving up inclines, the system prevents
your vehicle from rolling backward in an undes-
ired way.
After the engine is started, the system can be
activated and deactivated at any time the
driver's seat is occupied until the next time the
engine is switched off.
Activating
Press the button. The LED in the button lights
up and the indication AUTO H appears in the
instrument panel.
Automatic Hold is activated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic
Hold, the indicator light in the instru-
ment panel also lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
panel go out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to
page 61, Automatic Hold is automatically deac-
tivated.
Driving
With Automatic Hold activated, the vehicle is
automatically prevented from rolling after it
comes to a stop.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
If the transmission is in a drive position, simply
press on the gas pedal to begin driving. The
brake is automatically released and the indica-
tor lamp goes out.
Before driving into the car wash, deacti-
vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the park-
ing brake will be automatically set after stop-
ping and the vehicle can no longer roll.<
Parking
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold
and you switch off the motor, the parking brake
is automatically set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel changes from green to red.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The parking brake is not set if you have
already switched off the engine while the
vehicle is rolling to a stop.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
You can manually release the parking brake
even after switching off the motor as long as the
remote control remains in the ignition lock, refer
to page 61. Use this function in car washes, for
example.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<
For your safety
Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated
when:
>the engine is switched off
>the driver's door is open and the safety belt
of the driver is disconnected
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 62 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>the vehicle is braked to a stop during driving
In the instrument panel, the indicator
lamp changes from green to red and
the indication AUTO H goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Before you start to drive, either release the
parking brake manually, refer to page 61, or
reactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 62.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, shift the selector lever into posi-
tion P of the automatic transmission and make
sure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.<
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel
chock, if you leave the vehicle.
Releasing parking brake manually
In the event of an electrical power loss or elec-
trical malfunction, you can release the parking
brake manually.
Before manually releasing the parking
brake and each time you park the vehicle
without setting the parking brake, make sure
that the automatic transmission is in position P,
refer to page 65. Be sure to pay attention to the
information in the instrument panel.
In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
steep slope.<
If it becomes necessary to also release the
transmission lock of the automatic transmission
manually, follow this sequence:
1. If necessary, start by releasing the parking
brake manually.
2. Then release the automatic transmission's
transmission lock manually, refer to
page 66.
Jump starting and towing, refer to information
starting on page 262.
Releasing
1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit * and warning trian-
gle* if necessary. Close the bracket of the
warning triangle.
3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the
onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer
to page 250, at the releasing point.
4. Firmly pull the releasing tool upward against
the mechanical resistance, refer to arrow,
until a considerable increase in force is felt
and the parking brake is then clearly heard
to release.
5. Stow the releasing tool, warning triangle*
and first-aid kit* and close the left side
panel in the cargo bay.
Only have a malfunction corrected by the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a workshop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel. If the parking brake has been
released manually in response to a malfunction,
only technicians can return it to operation.<
Following manual release, the actual sta-
tus of the parking brake may deviate from
that displayed by the indicator lamp.<
Operation after interruptions in power
supply
The parking brake can only be used again
if it was manually released due to an inter-
ruption in the supply of electrical power. Other-
wise the operation of the parking brake is not
ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle roll-
ing despite the parking brake being set.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 63 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
64
Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation again.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Any noises which occur are normal. Startup
may take several seconds.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 65.
Transmission positions
P R N D M/S + –
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.<
Displays in instrument panel
P R N D, DS*, S1* through S6*, M1 through M6
The transmission position and the currently
engaged gear are displayed.
Engaging transmission position
>You can only engage transmission posi-
tions D, R or N when the engine is running.
>With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise the shift command will not be
executed: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<
Shifting into D, R, N
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired
direction, beyond a resistance point if neces-
sary. When shifting out of P or into R, simulta-
neously push the unlock button 1.
The engaged transmission position is displayed
on the selector lever.
The selector lever immediately returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Also observe the additional information on the
automatic transmission.
The transmission automatically shifts into
park if you release the driver's safety belt
and open the driver's door with the engine run-
ning while in reverse or drive.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 64 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
R Reverse
Select only with the vehicle stationary.
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into transmission position R. To release the
lock, push the unlock button 1.
P Park
Select only with the vehicle stationary. The rear
wheels are locked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as
you switch off the engine unless N is
engaged and on vehicles with comfort access
the remote control is inserted in the ignition
lock, refer to page 59.<
N Neutral
Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car
washes. The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off whenever you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. This function
is used, for example, in a car wash, refer to
page 60. After approx. 30 minutes P is auto-
matically engaged.<
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-
eration.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the
increased resistance at full throttle.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Press selector lever out of transmission
position D toward the left:
The sport program is activated and DS is
displayed in the instrument cluster; in the
BMW X6, S1 through S6 are displayed. This
position is recommended for a performance-
oriented driving style.
When the selector lever is pressed forward or
back, the manual mode is activated and the
Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument
panel shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
To use the automatic function again, press the
selector lever to the right into position D.
BMW X6: changing gears using shifting
paddles on steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
>In automatic mode D, if you shift using the
shifting paddles on the steering wheel, then
the system switches into manual mode.
>If, after a certain amount of time, you neither
shift with the shifting paddles nor acceler-
ate, then the system switches back into
automatic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S
selected, the manual mode remains
active.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 65 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
66
>Upshifting: pull on one of the shifting pad-
dles, arrows +.
>Downshifting: press on one of the shifting
paddles, arrows –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Manually releasing and engaging
transmission lock
In case of a power failure, e.g. when the
battery is drained or disconnected, or an
electrical malfunction, the transmission lock
must be manually released, as otherwise the
rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot
be towed.<
Step on the brake when manually releas-
ing the transmission lock; otherwise,
there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
The transmission lock should only be released
for towing. Reengage the transmission lock
after parking the vehicle at its destination.
If it also becomes necessary to manually
release the parking brake, follow this sequence:
1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
2. Manually release the parking brake, refer to
page 63.
3. Manually release the transmission lock of
the automatic transmission.
Releasing
1. Slide back the cover of the cup holder and
remove the floor mat on the bar between
the cup holders, arrow 1.
2. Open the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder with the releasing tool from the
onboard tool kit, page 250, refer to arrow 2.
3. If necessary, unlock the lock* with the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 26, and remove it.
4. Insert the releasing tool into the opening,
arrow 3.
5. Turn the releasing tool as far as possible,
arrow 4, and then press downward and
leave it in. The transmission lock is
released.
Engage the transmission lock after park-
ing the vehicle at its destination. Other-
wise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 66 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Locking
1. Pull out the releasing tool.
The transmission lock is engaged again.
2. If necessary, insert the lock* and lock it.
3. Close the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder and lay in the mat again.
4. Close the cover of the cup holder and stow
the releasing tool.
Information on jump starting and towing, from
page 262.
Turn signals/headlamp
flasher/high beams
1High beams
2Headlamp flasher
3Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever up to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<
Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever up to the resistance point. The
turn signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Washer/wiper system
1Switching on wipers
2Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor*
4Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
5Setting interval for intermittent wipe or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 67 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
68
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode with the vehicle stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed with the
vehicle stationary.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor*
With the rain sensor, the wiper operation is con-
trolled automatically as a function of the rain
intensity. The rain sensor is located on the
windshield, directly in front of the interior rear-
view mirror.
Activating intermittent operation or
rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting interval for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel 5.
Deactivating intermittent operation or
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular
and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washing mechanisms when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
BMW X5: rear window wiper
1Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, continuous operation is switched
on automatically
2Cleaning the rear window
Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, other-
wise you will damage the washer pump.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 68 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For
this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only add washer fluid with the engine
cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a dan-
ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is
spilled.<
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
The cruise control with a braking function is
available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and
maintains the speed that you set using the lever
mounted on the steering column. To keep the
specified speed constant, the system brakes if
the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a
downhill grade.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1Storing speed and maintaining or increas-
ing
2Storing speed and maintaining or decreas-
ing
3Deactivating cruise control
4Resuming stored speed
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press, arrow 1, or briefly pull, arrow 2
lever.
The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument panel.
The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades
if the engine output is insufficient. If the engine
braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill
grade, the system lightly brakes the vehicle.
Increasing speed
Repeatedly press the lever up to or beyond the
resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is set.
>Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-
tance point, the speed is increased by
approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 69 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving
70
>Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed
increases by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/
h.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.
Accelerating with lever
Accelerate slightly:
Press the lever up to the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate more rapidly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores the
setting and maintains the set speed.
Reducing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.
>Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
>Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
>when braking
>when transmission position N is engaged
>when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated
>when HDC is activated
>when the parking brake is set
>when driving stability control systems inter-
vene
Accelerating does not deactivate the cruise
control. After releasing the accelerator pedal,
the stored speed is reached and maintained
again.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up if the
cruise control has been deactivated
automatically, e.g. by a control inter-
vention of the DSC. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Resuming stored speed
Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
With the ignition switched off, the stored speed
value is deleted and cannot be resumed again.
Displays in instrument panel
1Stored desired speed
2Selected desired speed appears briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument panel display, it is possi-
ble that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up if the sys-
tem has failed. A message appears on
the Control Display. Detailed informa-
tion is provided from page 77.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 70 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1Knob in the instrument cluster
2Time, outside temperature, and date
3Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument panel
>With ignition switched on
Press knob:
Resetting trip odometer
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds:
Displaying service requirements, refer to
page 74
>With ignition switched off
Press knob:
Briefly displaying time, outside temperature
and odometer
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 80.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, date, outside temperature
From radio readiness the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.
Setting the time, refer to page 79.
Retrieving date
Press the button on turn signal lever upward;
the date appears.
To set the date, refer to page 80.
Pressing the button upward or downward sev-
eral times changes the display between clock,
outside temperature, date, and Check Control
messages, refer to page 78.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel with the
ignition switched on.
When vehicle is parked
To briefly display the time, outside temperature
and mileage after the remote control has been
removed from the ignition lock:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 71 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
Tachometer
Do not operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge, refer to arrow.
At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is
interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 243.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at operating temperature,
the engine oil temperature is between approx.
1707/806 and approx. 2507/1206.
When the engine oil temperature is too high, a
warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Energy control*
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 72 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 22.5 US gal/
85 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 224.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument panel
To display the information, press the BC button
on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed:
>Cruising range
>Average speed
>Average fuel consumption
>BMW X6: Dynamic Performance Control,
refer to page 90
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
stopped are not included in the calculations of
average speed.
To reset average speed: press the BC button on
the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption:
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed and average
consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer*.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 73 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
Displays on Control Display
You can also access the computer using iDrive.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
>Cruising range
>Distance from destination
>Estimated time of arrival if:
>Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
>A destination was entered in the naviga-
tion system*, refer to page 141.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
>Departure time
>Trip duration
>Trip distance
Both displays show:
>The average speed and
>the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con-
troller again.
Resetting the Trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
To determine the extent of maintenance
required, you can also display the remaining
distance or the service date individually in the
instrument panel.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 74 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument panel, refer to
page 71, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the
individual service requirement items.
Displaying service requirements
1Knob for selecting display
2Service requirements
3Engine oil
4Legally mandated inspections*
5Front brake pads
6Rear brake pads
7Brake fluid
The sequence of the displayed maintenance
items can vary. First the data for the next main-
tenance are displayed.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 75 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service
required can be displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally
mandated inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 80; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 244.
Automatic Service Notification*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center prior to a service due
date.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 76 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can check when your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message
disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 78.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Exit the displayed information:
Move the controller to the left.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 77 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever up or
down.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button on the turn signal lever
downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear in the dis-
play.
"CHECK OK" is shown if no messages are
present.
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional mes-
sages, the time and outside temperature, or
the date.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting, or changing speed
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 78 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Applying your current speed as limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The system applies your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
Settings on Control Display
Setting the time
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Time/Date"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 79 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
Setting time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Setting date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units of measure for con-
sumption, distances, temperature and pres-
sure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 80 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Language on Control Display
set language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Volume of warning tones
You can raise or lower the volume of the warn-
ing signals, e.g. the safety belt reminder, in rela-
tion to the entertainment sound output. The
warning tones have a specified minimum and
maximum volume that cannot be dropped
below or exceeded.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
>"Speed volume": adaptation of the vol-
ume as a function of vehicle speed
>"PDC": volume of the PDC* signal tone
in comparison to entertainment sound
output
>"Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.
for the safety belt reminder, in compari-
son to entertainment sound output
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 81 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
82
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rear view camera*, refer to page 86, can
also be switched on.
PDC assists you during parking. A slow
approach to an object in front of or behind your
vehicle is announced by:
>Signal tones
>Optical displays
Measurement
Ultrasonic sensors in the bumpers carry out the
measurement.
Their range is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
The acoustic warning begins:
>at approx. 24 in/60 cm for the front* sen-
sors and the two rear corner sensors.
>at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m for the middle sen-
sors in the rear.
System limitations
PDC cannot replace the personal assess-
ment of the traffic situation. Also make a
direct visual check of the traffic situation around
the vehicle. Otherwise, there could be a risk of
accident, for example due to other road users or
objects outside the detection range of PDC.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Avoid approaching an object too quickly.
Avoid starting off quickly while PDC is not
yet activated.
Otherwise, physical circumstances could cause
the system to issue a warning late.<
Limitations of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can come up against
the limitations of physical ultrasonic measure-
ment, for example:
>when using tow bars and towing hitches
>in the presence of thin or wedge-shaped
objects
>in the presence of low objects
>in the presence of objects with corners and
sharp edges
Low objects that have already been displayed,
e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detec-
tion area of the sensors before or after a contin-
uous tone sounds.
Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot
be detected.
False warnings
Under the following conditions, PDC may dis-
play a warning even though no obstacle is
present in the detection range:
>in heavy rain
>when the sensors are heavily soiled or iced-
over
>when the sensors are covered with snow
>on rough road surfaces
>in large, rectangular buildings with smooth
walls, e.g. underground garages
>in the presence of heavy exhaust
>due to the presence of other ultrasonic
sources such as street sweepers, steam
cleaners, or neon lamps.
Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 82 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic deactivation
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
>after approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving for-
ward
>at speeds over approx. 25 mph/35 km/h
when driving forward
Switch the system back on as needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
>On: LED lights up
>Off: LED goes out
Signal tones
When nearing an object, the position is corre-
spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc.
The shorter the distance to the object
becomes, the shorter the intervals become.
If the distance to the nearest object falls to
below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous
tone sounds.
If objects are present both in front of and behind
the vehicle, then an alternating, continuous
tone sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
>when the vehicle remains stationary in front
of an object that has only been detected by
one of the corner sensors
>when driving parallel to a wall
The signal tone is switched off:
>when the vehicle is more than approx.
4.0 in/10 cm away from an object
>when the selector lever is in the P position
Volume
You can adjust the volume of the signal tone,
refer to page 81.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Optical warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are displayed on the Control Display before a
signal tone sounds.
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti-
vated.
If the last image selected was the rear view
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
PDC:
1. Select the "Switch off rear view camera"
symbol on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
1. Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol .
2. Press the controller.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 83 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
84
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Malfunction
A Check Control message appears in the
instrument panel, refer to page 77.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle
appear in shaded form on the Control Display.
PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system
checked.
In order to assure full functionality:
>Keep sensors clean and free of ice.
>Do not spray the sensors with high-pres-
sure cleaners for long periods and keep the
spray nozzle at least 12 in/30 cm away from
them.
Top View*
The concept
Top View assists you when parking and maneu-
vering. To accomplish this, the door region and
road surface region are shown on the Control
Display.
Detection
Detection is carried out by two cameras inte-
grated into the exterior mirror and the rear view
camera.
The range is:
>approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side
>approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear
Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mir-
rors are thus detected in a timely fashion.
System limitations
In the following situations, the function of
Top View is limited:
>when a door is open
>when the liftgate is open
>when the exterior mirrors are folded in
>under poor lighting conditions
The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in a
shaded form on the Control Display and a sym-
bol appears at the corresponding location on
the vehicle.
Also make a direct visual check of the
traffic situation around the vehicle. Other-
wise, there could be a risk of accident, for exam-
ple due to other road users or objects outside
the image range of the camera.<
Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The images from Top View and PDC are dis-
played when the system has been switched on
using iDrive.
Automatic deactivation
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
>after approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving for-
ward
>at speeds over approx. 25 mph/35 km/h
when driving forward
Switch the system back on as needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
>On: LED lights up.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 84 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>Off: LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the rear view
camera using iDrive, refer to page 87.
Optical warning
The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, the
PDC display correspondingly shows a red bar in
front of the vehicle.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the last image selected was the rear view
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
Top View:
1. Select the "Switch off rear view camera"
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With Top View activated:
1. Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol .
2. Press the controller.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
Displaying turning lines and pathway
lines
>The static, red turning line shows the lateral
space required when the wheel is fully
turned.
>The variable, green pathway lines assist you
in estimating the amount of lateral space
actually required.
The pathway lines depend on the current
steering angle and are continuously
adapted to movements of the steering
wheel.
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the
undersides of the exterior mirror housings.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 85 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
Rear view camera*
The concept
The rear view camera assists you when parking
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish
this, the region behind your vehicle is shown on
the Control Display.
System limitations
Also make a direct visual check of the
traffic situation around the vehicle. Other-
wise, there could be a risk of accident, for exam-
ple due to other road users or objects outside
the image range of the rear view camera.<
The rear view camera is not able to detect
objects at greater heights or protruding
objects such as projections from walls.<
Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
Automatic deactivation
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
>after approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for-
ward
>at speeds over approx. 9 mph/15 km/h
when driving forward
Switch the system back on as needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
>On: LED lights up.
>Off: LED goes out.
If PDC is displayed, switch on the rear view
camera using iDrive, refer to page 83.
Assistance functions
Function requirements
>Rear view camera is switched on.
>Liftgate is completely closed.
Pathway lines
>Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera when the transmission is in
reverse.
>Help estimate the required amount of space
when parking and maneuvering on a flat
road surface.
>Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
To display parking aid lines using iDrive, refer to
page 87.
Turning lines
>Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 86 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>Show the path of the smallest turning circle
on a flat road surface.
>When the steering wheel is turned, only one
turning line is displayed.
To display parking aid lines using iDrive, refer to
page 87.
Parking using pathway and turning
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
lead into the margins of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the pathway
lines coincide with the corresponding turn-
ing line.
Obstacle marking
>Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
be displayed in the image of the rear view
camera.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark-
ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
the object pictured.
To display obstacle marking using iDrive, refer
to page 87.
Activating assistance functions
Several assistance functions can be active at
the same time.
Displaying parking aid lines
1. Select the "Parking aid lines" symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.
Displaying obstacle marking
1. Select the "Display obstacle marking"
symbol.
2. Press the controller.
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis-
played.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
1. Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol.
2. Press the controller.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness
With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 87 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
Camera
The lens of the rear view camera is under the
grasping lip of the liftgate.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 132.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steer-
ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. The system
also identifies unstable driving conditions, such
as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or
sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions in the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style remains the responsibility of the driver.
Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety
margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold the button until the indicator
lamp for DSC lights up and DSC OFF appears in
the instrument panel, but do not press the but-
ton for longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti-
vated together. Stabilizing interventions are
now not carried out.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 88 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button: the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC and DTC are malfunctioning.
DSC deactivated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
panel.
DSC and DTC deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
>When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
>When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow, sand or on loose
ground
>When driving with snow chains*
Activating DTC
Press the button: the indicator lamp for DSC
lights up and TRACTION appears in the instru-
ment panel.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DTC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC and DTC are malfunctioning.
DTC activated:
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC-
TION appears in the instrument panel.
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again: the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 89 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
90
xDrive
xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your
BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv-
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
the front and rear axle depending on the driving
situation and prevailing road conditions.
Dynamic Performance Control*
The concept
Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
handling characteristics of your BMW when
starting off, cornering, and during evasive
maneuvers. To achieve this, the system variably
distributes the drive torque of the rear axle to
the two rear wheels. This further increases the
steering precision and tracking stability of your
vehicle.
Display
The Control Display shows how xDrive and
Dynamic Performance Control are distributing
the drive forces.
Press the BC button in the turn signal lever,
refer to page 73, until the display appears.
The current distribution of drive forces is indi-
cated by arrows pointing to all four wheels.
The highlighted arrows show the drive forces
currently present. The longer an arrow is, the
greater the drive forces in the associated wheel.
The transparent arrows indicate the maximum
value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.
Malfunction
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 77.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep
terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on
steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to
maintain even better control of your BMW
under these conditions. The vehicle moves at
approximately walking speed without active
intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
down steep hills with a speed below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed
automatically down to approximately walking
speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h, and then main-
tains this speed at a constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
Increasing or reducing speed
You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary
this automatically controlled speed within a
range extending from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to
15 mph/25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.
With downhill grade over 10Ξ you can reduce
the speed to approx. 3mph/4km/h. Pull the
lever of the cruise control beyond the resis-
tance point, arrow 3.
1Increasing speed
2Pull to the resistance point:
Reduce speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 90 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3Pull beyond the resistance point:
With downhill grade over 10Ξ, reduce
speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up.
The HDC display is shown in the instrument
panel.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again. The LED and the HDC
display go out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Displays* in instrument panel
1Display for target speed
2HDC display
Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
situations due to a high brake temperature:
>The LED in the button and the display HDC
go out during HDC operation.
>The LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.
Malfunction of driving stability control
systems
When driving on poor roads, avoid using
full throttle or pressing the accelerator
beyond the kick-down point and also avoid
heavy braking. Otherwise, the drive train may be
damaged or accidents can occur.<
Adaptive Drive*
The concept
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which
occurs when cornering quickly or during fast
evasive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive
reduces the steering angle requirement,
improves the running comfort and increases
the dynamic driving characteristics of your
BMW.
Chassis and suspension tuning
You can choose between two types of chassis
and suspension tuning.
>Normal:
The comfortable basic setting offers opti-
mum comfort when traveling.
>Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased
driving agility.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 91 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
Selecting chassis and suspension
tuning
Press the button.
The system switches between the two chassis
and suspension tuning settings.
>Sport:
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
is displayed in the instrument panel.
>Normal:
The LED in the button goes out.
The selection of the chassis and suspension
tuning setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<
Self-leveling suspension*
The concept
The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle
assures a continuous ground clearance.
To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured
by sensors at both rear wheels.
If the actual height deviates from the defined
height, e.g. due to loading of the vehicle, then
this difference is compensated for very quickly.
In addition, spring motions resulting from cor-
nering or irregularities in the road surface are
reduced to a minimum.
The system functions automatically.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 77.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ-
ual wheels during driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.
Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-
rected and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 92 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
>System has not been initialized
>Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
>Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
>Driving with snow chains*
When you are driving with the compact wheel*
the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys-
tem when driving with snow chains* or with the
compact wheel*.<
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
6. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving. "Sta-
tus: Flat Tire Monitor active " is displayed again
on the Control Display.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
If you have deactivated DSC, it will be activated
automatically.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
In case of further air loss of the defective
wheel, its position will be indicated to you
on the Control Display.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving.
Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
>With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
>With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
>With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event
of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 93 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, e.g. a compact wheel*, or if TPM is
temporarily interfered with by other systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
>TPM is being reset
>Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
>Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 94 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not reset the system when driving with a
compact wheel*.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-
tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-
ing driving. On the Control Display, the tires are
shown in green and "Status: TPM active " is
displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Low tire!" is shown.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving.
Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
>With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
>With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
>With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event
of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Status display
The current status of the TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor can be displayed on the Control Dis-
play, e.g. whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 95 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
>In case of a malfunction:
Have the system checked
>If a wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g. a compact wheel*
>If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency
Explanation according to the NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi-
cle has tires of a different size than the size indi-
cated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
The active steering actively varies the steering
angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer-
ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies
the steering force required for steering depend-
ing on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 96 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow
and a message is shown on the Con-
trol Display. The active steering is
defective or has been temporarily
deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering
wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensi-
tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil-
ity-promoting intervention can also be deacti-
vated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively.
Deactivation
Active steering deactivates in order to carry out
an initialization. This deactivation is displayed
by means of a message. The initialization can
take several minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
In the event of a defect, a corresponding text
message is displayed. Have the system
checked.
Brake force display*
BMW X5
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
BMW X6
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 97 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1Front airbags
2Head-level airbags in front and rear
3Side airbags in backrests
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the instrument cluster and window in the
region of the passenger seat free of foreign
materials, i.e. do not cover them with adhesive
film or covers and do not attach mounts, e.g. for
a navigation device or mobile phone to them.
Do not install cosmetic covers, seat cushions,
or other items on the front seats that are not
especially approved for seats with integrated
side airbags. Do not hang articles of clothing
such as jackets over the backrests.
Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint
system from the vehicle. Do not modify or
tamper with either the wiring or the individual
components in the airbag system. This includes
the upholstery in the center of the steering
wheel, on the instrument cluster, the doors, and
the roof pillars as well as the sides of the head-
liner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel. Do not touch the individual
components immediately after the system has
been triggered, because there is a danger of
burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel and has
the required explosives licenses. Otherwise
unprofessional attempts to service the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or undes-
ired airbag triggering, either of which could
result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbags on the front passenger side are
activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys-
tem.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 98 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 55.
When teenagers and adults assume certain sit-
ting positions, this can cause the front and side
airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp for the
front passenger airbags lights up when this
occurs. In these cases, change the sitting posi-
tion so that the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired status cannot be produced by changing
the sitting position, transport the correspond-
ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov-
ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other
items onto the front passenger seat unless they
are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not
lay objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor-
rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indica-
tor lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.
>The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint device intended for the pur-
pose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are not activated.
Most child's seats are detected by the
system. Especially the child's seats
required by the NHTSA at the time the vehi-
cle is manufactured. After installing a child's
seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for
the front passenger airbags lights up. This
indicates that the child's seat has been
detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.<
>The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
>The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbags on the
front passenger side are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
>Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
>Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 99 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
100
Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
1Navigation information or Check Control
messages
2Cruise control
3Speed
Selecting displays
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-Up
Display.
The information is shown on the Head-Up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of
the instrument lighting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
height adjustment
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 100 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-
play is influenced by:
>Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
>Certain sitting positions
>Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play
>Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, have the basic setting
checked at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Cen-
ter.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the require-
ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre-
cise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Care instructions
Important information on this topic is provided
on page 249.
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 101 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Lamps
102
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0Lights off and daytime driving lamps*
1Parking lamps and daytime driving lamps*
2Low beams and welcome lamps
3Automatic headlamp control*, daytime
driving lamps*, welcome lamps, Adaptive
Head Light* and high-beam assistant*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati-
cally switched off when the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
If necessary, switch on the parking lamps,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is better to switch on
the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to
page 104.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on. You can
activate the daytime driving lamps, refer to
page 103. In the situations named above, the
system then automatically switches over to the
low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, if you leave the light
switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when the vehi-
cle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 102 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Welcome lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
Setting the duration or deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set a time of duration or 0 s to deactivate
the function.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime driving lamps*
The daytime driving lamps light up in position 0,
1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1,
the parking lamps light up after the ignition is
switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Daytime driving lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turn-
ing, up to a speed of approx. 45 mph/70 km/h
one of the two fog lamps* is switched on as a
turning lamp. This provides improved illumina-
tion of the area inside the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 102.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 103 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Lamps
104
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1High beams
2Headlamp flasher
3Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for approx.
1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off again. The process is con-
trolled by a sensor on the front side of the inte-
rior rearview mirror. The Assistant makes sure
that the high beams are switched on whenever
the traffic situation permits. This relieves you of
eyestrain and at the same time offers you the
best possible visibility. Naturally, you can inter-
vene at any time and switch the high beams on
and off as usual.
Activating system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 102.
2. With the low beams on, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam set-
ting.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off, reacting not only to oncoming traffic and
traffic ahead, but also to sufficient illumination,
e.g. in built-up areas.
Switching high beams on and off
manually
If you wish or the situation requires it, you can
intervene at any time:
>If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you want to use low
beams, simply switch them on using the
turn signal lever. This deactivates the high-
beam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam
position.
>If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you want to use high
beams, simply switch them on in the usual
way. This deactivates the system and you
must switch to low beams manually.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam
position.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 104 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>Use the headlamp flasher as usual when the
low beams are on.
System limits
The high-beam assistant cannot replace
personal judgment about the use of high
beams. In situations that require it, you should
therefore switch to low beams manually; failure
to do so can constitute a safety hazard.<
In the following sample situations, the system
will not function or will only function to a limited
degree, possibly requiring the driver to react
personally:
>in extremely unfavorable weather condi-
tions such as fog or heavy precipitation
>when you perceive poorly illuminated road
users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horse-
back riders, carriages, when rail or shipping
traffic is close to the road, or at deer cross-
ings
>in sharp curves, on steep hilltops or dips,
when there cross-traffic, or in the presence
of half-concealed oncoming traffic on the
highway
>in poorly lit areas and in the presence of
highly reflective signs
>in the low speed range
>when the windshield in the region of the
interior rearview mirror is fogged, dirty, or
covered by stickers, decals, etc.
>when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the interior rearview mir-
ror with a cloth moistened with a little glass
cleaner.
Switching off using iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
High-beam assistant is activated and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Fog lamps*
First, switch on the parking lamps or the low
beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru-
ment panel lights up whenever the fog lamps
are on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using
the thumbwheel.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 105 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Lamps
106
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, door entry
lighting*, cargo bay lamps, and the courtesy
lamps* are controlled automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 59.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press the button.
If you wish the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting and courtesy lamps to
remain switched off all the time, press the but-
ton for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are provided in the front and
rear* adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the
button to switch the lamps on and off.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 106 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
1Air toward the windshield and side windows
2Air for the upper body region, refer to Front
ventilation on page 111
3Air to footwell
4Automatic climate control with 2-zone con-
trol, refer to page 108
Automatic climate control with 4-zone con-
trol, refer to page 112
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 107 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Climate
108
Automatic climate control with 2-zone control
1Seat heating and ventilation, driver's
side 51
2Temperature, left side of passenger com-
partment
3AUTO program
4Temperature, right side of passenger com-
partment
5Maximum cooling
6Seat heating and ventilation, front passen-
ger side 51
7Passenger side
>Air distribution, manual
>Accessing setting for ventilation tem-
perature on the Control Display
8Switching cooling function on and off man-
ually
9AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat
11 Rear window defroster
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Driver's side
>Air distribution, manual
>Accessing setting for ventilation tem-
perature on the Control Display
The current setting for manual air distribution is
displayed on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
pleasant to you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 26.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 108 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Intensity of AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
When you press the button on the display of the
automatic climate control, the current setting
appears on the Control Display.
Select the intensity of the AUTO program:
>–Low
>–Medium
>–High
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi-
mum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating capacity, regardless of the outside tem-
perature. And in the lowest setting, the maxi-
mum cooling capacity.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Adapting Ventilation temperature
This function allows you to adapt the interior
temperature separately for the driver and pas-
senger when the automatic climate control is
switched off.
Use the controller on the Control Display to
adjust the ventilation temperature.
To accomplish this, the access the Ventilation
temperature setting manually via the buttons
for air distribution, refer to page 108, or via
iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. Select "Driver ventilation" or "Front pas-
senger ventilation".
4. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera-
ture.
>Turn toward blue: colder
>Turn toward red: warmer
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
while. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, upper wires are used
as an antenna and are not part of the rear win-
dow defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 109 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Climate
110
Air distribution, manual
You can use various programs to separately
direct the emerging airflow to the driver and
passenger side of the vehicle interior.
>Upper body region
>Upper body region and footwell
>Footwell
>Driver's side: also the windshield, side win-
dows, and footwell
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired program is shown on
the Control Display.
1Air toward the windshield and side windows
2Air for the upper body
3Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<
The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
This function is only available when the engine
is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensa-
tion on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
The automatic climate control switches into the
recirculated-air mode at the lowest tempera-
ture. The maximum air volume flows out of the
air vents for the upper body. Therefore, open
these vents for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and con-
trols the shut-off automatically.
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
>LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
>Left LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
>Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
without interruption over an extended period of
time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteri-
orates continuously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at
a school to pick up a child.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 110 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching on
Pressing the right side switches on
the residual heat utilization when
the following conditions are met:
>up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
>with the engine at operating temperature
>with sufficient battery voltage
>at an outside temperature below 777/
256
REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utiliza-
tion is switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching off
You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing
again switches off the residual heat utilization.
REST disappears from the display of the auto-
matic climate control.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
Front ventilation
1Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents
2Levers to change the air vent direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
air vents, otherwise these could be cata-
pulted outwards and lead to injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the air vents to direct the flow of cool air
in your direction, for instance, if the interior has
become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
and is not directed straight at you.
Ventilation in rear
1Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents
2Thumbwheel for adjusting the temperature
in the upper body region:
>Turn toward blue: colder
>Turn toward red: warmer
3Levers to change the air vent direction
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 111 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Climate
112
BMW X5: heating and ventilation,
3rd row seats
The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be
heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in
the storage compartment area between the
seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.
1Thumbwheel:
>Activating heating and distributing air in
footwell:
Turn toward front
>Distributing air in storage compartment
area between seats:
Turn toward rear
2Button for switching on blower:
LED lights up
The heating is not ready for operation
without switching on the blower. After the
heating is switched off, the blower can be used
to recirculate the air within the vehicle, e.g. at
high temperatures. To do this, turn the thumb-
wheel 1 toward the rear and switch on the
blower, button 2.<
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. This com-
bined filter is changed during maintenance by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
You can select a display of more detailed infor-
mation on the Control Display, refer to page 74.
Automatic climate control
with 4-zone control*
Front operation
Corresponds to the operation of the automatic
climate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 108.
Rear operation
The control unit is located in the center console
in the rear.
1Temperature, left rear seating area
2AUTO program
3Display
4Temperature, right rear seating area
5Seat heating, right rear seat
6Air volume, manual
7Seat heating, left rear seat
The current setting for the temperature and the
air volume is shown on display 3.
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 112 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Select the desired settings and press the
controller.
Function is activated.
The rear automatic climate control
cannot be operated if the front auto-
matic climate control is switched off. With
the defrost windows and eliminate conden-
sation function activated, the rear automatic
climate control is also not ready for opera-
tion.<
AUTO program
The AUTO program assumes the
adjustment of the air distribution
toward the upper body and in the
footwell, as well as the air volume
for you. It also adapts your instruc-
tions for the temperature to outside influences
throughout the year.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the left and right side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly
as possible at any time of year, if necessary with
the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and
then keeps it constant.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.
Switching off rear automatic climate
control
You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control can also be
switched off with iDrive. To switch on the
automatic climate control again, the system
must first be reactivated, refer to Activating/
deactivating.<
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the rear automatic climate control.
Ventilation in rear
1Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents
2Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in
upper body region; can be adjusted sepa-
rately for left and right:
>Turn toward blue: colder
>Turn toward red: warmer
3Levers to change the air vent direction
BMW X5
1Levers to change the air vent direction
2Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close
air vents
For information on the ventilation of the 3rd row
seats, refer to page 112.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 113 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Climate
114
Parked-car ventilation*
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked-car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
The air emerges through the upper body region
air vents in the instrument cluster. Therefore,
please open the air vents.
The parked-car ventilation is operated via
iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The parked-car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked-car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked-car ventilation is only avail-
able for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<
Only one activation time can be activated at a
time.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 114 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 116.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
Should you have additional questions,
please contact your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1Memory buttons
2LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 59.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press the left and right-hand memory but-
ton 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes quickly. All stored programs are
deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the inte-
grated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 115 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device cannot be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory but-
ton 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote
control flashes rapidly for a short time and then
remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates
that the original hand-held transmitter uses an
alternating-code system. In the case of an alter-
nating-code system, program the memory but-
tons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-
held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, observe the
following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Should you have questions, please con-
tact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
quickly:
All stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. When the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button of
the original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.
Digital compass*
1Adjustment button
2Display
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 116 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The display indicates the cardinal or intercardi-
nal direction in which you are currently driving.
Operating principle
You can run various functions by pressing the
adjustment button with a pointed object, e.g. a
ball-point pen etc. The following setting options
are displayed consecutively, depending on how
long the adjustment button is pressed:
>Press briefly: switch display on/off
>3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
>6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
>9 to 12 seconds: set left/right-hand drive
vehicle
>12 to 15 seconds: set language
Setting compass zones
Set the respectively applicable compass zone
in your vehicle so that the compass functions
properly, refer to the map of the world with
compass zones.
To set the compass zones, press the adjust-
ment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The dis-
play indicates the number of the currently set
compass zone.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjusting button repeatedly until the number of
the compass zone that applies to your current
position is displayed.
The compass will be operational again after
approx. 10 seconds.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 117 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
118
Calibrating digital compass
Calibrate the digital compass In the following
situations:
>The wrong cardinal direction appears on
the display.
>The cardinal direction displayed does not
change despite a change in the direction of
travel.
>Not all cardinal directions are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal
objects or overhead power lines in the vicin-
ity of your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Enter the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to display C. Then drive in a
complete circle at least once at a maximum
speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the calibration is successful, display C is
replaced with the points of the compass.
Setting right/left-hand drive vehicle
Your digital compass is already set to right or
left-hand drive vehicle to match your vehicle at
the factory.
Setting language
You can set the language of the display.
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to change between English "E"
and German "O".
The setting is automatically stored after approx.
10 seconds.
Roller sun blinds for rear side
windows*
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Do not open the window with the roller
blind raised, as otherwise there is a dan-
ger of damage, and therefore a danger of inju-
ries at higher speeds.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The covers open upward and
downward and the lighting in the glove com-
partment switches on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Press one of the two covers closed.
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 178.
Observe the following when connecting:
>Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB audio interface.
>Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 118 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
119
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
>Do not connect USB hard disks.
>Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front
A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for
the mobile phone bracket or the snap-in
adapter. Also refer to page 202.
Opening cover
Push cover down slightly and press the button.
The cover folds upward.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's speaker system:
>AUX-IN connection, refer to page 183
>USB audio interface, refer to page 183
Storage compartments
Compartments are located in the doors, in the
center console in the front and rear* as well as
in the rear console in the X6.
Storage nets* are located on the backrests of
the front seats.
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent.<
Clothes hooks
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
BMW X5
Clothes hooks are located near the grab han-
dles in the rear.
BMW X6
To fold out, press against upper edge.
Cup holders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages; oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable
containers into the cup holders, as otherwise
damage can result.<
Front
Slide the cover back.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 119 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
120
Rear
BMW X5
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Press the button; the cover folds forward.
With the 3rd row seats*:
Fold down the center armrest.
Press the button; the cup holders are opened.
The cup holders of the 3rd row seats are
located in the center console between the
seats.
BMW X6
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the beverage container before
folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag; otherwise it may cause dam-
age.<
Ashtray
Front
To open the cover, slide it forward.
Rear
BMW X6
Slide the cover back.
Remove the insert to empty.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 120 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
121
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lighter
Front
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.
In cargo bay
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
In rear center console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack-
age, the socket in the rear is covered with a cap
or equipped with a lighter. Refer to Cigarette
lighter, front, page 121.
Access to socket:
Remove cap or lighter.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 121 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
122
In storage compartment under center
armrest
Access to socket*:
Pull off the cover.
BMW X6: in rear console
Slide the cover back.
Access to socket:
Pull off the cover.
Rear center armrest
BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row
seats*
Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm-
rest.
BMW X5 without 3rd row seats*
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Cargo bay
BMW X5: roll-up cover
Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the
brackets.
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
roll-up cover. If you do so, they may
already pose a danger to vehicle occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.
Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, oth-
erwise it can be damaged.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 122 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
123
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Removing
1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case somewhat to the left,
arrow 2, and remove.
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1. Lay on the case on the left-hand side and
push it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case toward the inside, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the case forward at the ends until it
engages in the two side brackets.
4. Check whether the case is properly locked
in place by pulling it with a sudden move-
ment.
BMW X6: cargo bay cover
Deploy cargo bay cover by pulling back.
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
cargo bay cover. If you do so, they may
pose a danger to vehicle occupants during
braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Removing
1. Grasp retracted cargo bay cover under-
neath the upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment
package, you can store the cover under the
floor panel in the cargo bay.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 123 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
124
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1. Set the cargo bay cover into place on the
left and right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide
forward until it snaps into the two side
brackets.
Expanding cargo bay
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo bay.
BMW X6: before folding the rear seat
backrest forward or using the ski bag,
remove beverage containers from the cup
holder and close the cup holder.<
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure
that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess
when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or eva-
sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-
pants.<
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the safety belt information on
page 43.<
Storage compartments in
cargo bay
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing storage compartments are provided in
the cargo bay.
>Storage compartments behind the remov-
able side panels on the right and left side of
the cargo bay* and under the floor panel
flap, storage compartment* right side of
cargo bay.
>Storage tray* under the floor panel flap,
capacity approx. 21 US gal/80 liter.
>Retaining straps* on the left and right side
panel for securing small objects.
>Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can
secure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash-
ing eyes.
They can be removed at the notches in the
rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the
button.
Read and comply with the information
enclosed with the heavy-duty cargo
straps.<
Floor panel flap
To access the onboard toolkit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer
to arrow.
The floor panel flap can be locked*.
Adaptive fixing system*
The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the cargo bay. It consists of two brackets with a
telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are
guided into the two rails on the cargo bay floor.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 124 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
125
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Before using the adaptive fixing system,
fold up and lock the rear seat backrest;
otherwise, the cargo could be thrown into the
vehicle interior in an accident.<
1Brackets
2Telescopic rail
3Notch in the cargo bay rail
Mounting brackets
The two brackets are connected with a tele-
scopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch
in the rail on the cargo bay floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets.
They must be clearly heard to engage.
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth-
erwise they could be unlocked.<
Dividing up cargo bay
You can position the cargo as follows:
>between the rear seat backrest and the
telescopic rail
>between the telescopic rail and the retain-
ing strap
Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and
retaining strap:
1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press
the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining
strap around the cargo, arrow 2.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3
on the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1.
The retaining strap is tensioned.
You can also hook both retaining straps
into each other.<
When you are finished using the adaptive fixing
system, unhook the retaining strap and guide it
back into the bracket in order to prevent dam-
age and injury.
Then slide the fastening system toward the
front in order to permit the best possible use of
the cargo bay.
Removing brackets
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the
notches of the rails and remove them.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack-
age, you can store the adaptive fixing system
under the floor panel in the cargo bay.
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow-
boards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/
2.10 m in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend
to contract, reducing its overall capacity.
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis-
play screen of the DVD system in the
rear*, as otherwise the display screen could be
damaged.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 125 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
126
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo bay opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag
retaining strap into the center safety belt
buckle that is marked CENTER.
BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag
retaining strap to the eyelet on the rear seat
backrest.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.
1. Pull the handle toward the front, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Details on various inserts are available
from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 126 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Controls
127
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 127 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 128 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Driving tips
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 129 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
130
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-
ues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Engine and rear axle differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but
do not exceed:
>Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
>Diesel engine
3,500 rpm or 90 mph/150 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on various factors. Through a few simple steps,
your driving style, and regular maintenance, you
can have a positive influence on your fuel con-
sumption and environmental impact.
Removing unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Removing add-on parts after use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached
to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and
increase the fuel consumption.
Closing windows and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof*
An open glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
or open windows likewise increase the drag
coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.
Checking tire inflation pressures
regularly
Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as
needed at least twice a month and before long
trips.
An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases
the rolling resistance and thus increases the
fuel consumption and tire wear.
Driving off immediately
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 130 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
speed. This is the fastest way for the cold
engine to reach its operating temperature.
Thinking ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
To do so, maintain the appropriate distance
from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory
and smooth driving style reduces fuel con-
sumption.
Avoiding high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con-
sumption and minimizes wear.
Taking advantage of coasting
The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.
Switching off engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine at longer stops such as
traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic
congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if
the standing time is as short as approx. 4 sec-
onds.
Switching off functions currently not
required
Functions such as air conditioning, seat heat-
ing, or rear window defrosting consume a lot of
energy and require additional fuel. Their influ-
ence is particularly pronounced in city traffic
and stop & go operation. For this reason, it is a
good idea to switch these functions off when
they are not really needed.
Having maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to
achieve the optimum economy and service life
of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the
maintenance performed by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center. Also pay attention to
the BMW maintenance system, refer to
page 244.
General driving notes
Closing liftgate
Operate the vehicle only when the liftgate
is completely closed. Otherwise, exhaust
fumes could enter into the passenger compart-
ment.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lift-
gate open:
1. Close all windows as well as the glass sun-
roof*/panorama glass sunroof*.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 109.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot tailpipes, as
otherwise there is a danger of burns.<
Diesel particulate filter*
Soot particles are collected in the diesel partic-
ulate filter and periodically burned away at high
temperatures. This cleaning process lasts a few
minutes. You will notice it sometimes by the
fact that the engine temporarily runs slightly
less smoothly and requires a slightly higher
engine speed to delivery the usual power. You
may also hear sounds and observe a slight
amount of smoke coming from the exhaust up
to even a few moments after the engine is
switched off.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 131 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
132
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 236.
Driving through water
Maximum water depth:
>BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
>BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
Only drive through water up to the above-
mentioned depth at no greater than walk-
ing speed; otherwise, the engine, electrical sys-
tem, and transmission can be damaged.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting in the manual mode
of the automatic transmission, if necessary into
first gear, refer to page 65. This prevents an
excessive strain on the brakes.
Do not drive in idle or with the engine
stopped, otherwise there will be no
engine braking action or support of the braking
force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control system during operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 132 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-
aged.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
YYY lbs. or XXX kg. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from YYY lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
BMW X5:
BMW X6:
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 133 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
134
Stowing cargo
BMW X5
BMW X6
>Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
backrest.
>Cover sharp edges and corners.
>When transporting very heavy cargo with
unoccupied rear seats, insert the safety
belts, the outer safety belts in the BMW X5,
into the buckles on the opposite sides.
>Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
>Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects
which could strike the rear window while
driving.
Securing cargo
BMW X5
BMW X6
>Use the luggage net*, retaining straps*, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
>For larger and heavier pieces, heavy-duty
cargo straps* are available from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Four lashing
eyes* mounted in the cargo bay are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustrations.
>Observe the special instructions supplied
with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 134 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle weights,
refer to page 271, as excessive loads can pose
a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
with the attachment points for the top tether,
refer to page 56; otherwise they could be dam-
aged.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precau-
tions included with the installation instructions.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response. You should
therefore always remember not to exceed the
approved roof load capacity, the approved
gross vehicle weight or the axle weights when
loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 271.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed
and must not extend outward beyond the limits
of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest
pieces on the bottom. Be sure that adequate
clearance is maintained for raising the glass
sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof* and that
objects do not project into the opening path of
the liftgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Driving on poor roads
Your BMW is at home on all roads and surfaces.
It combines a 4-wheel drive system with the
advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other-
wise the vehicle may be damaged.<
When you are driving on poor roads, there are a
few points which you should strictly observe for
your own safety, for that of your passengers,
and for the safety of the vehicle:
>Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving off and avoid taking risks at all costs.
>Adapt your driving speed to the road condi-
tions. The steeper and rougher the road
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
>If you want to drive on very steep uphill or
downhill gradients, make sure beforehand
that the engine oil and coolant levels are
near the MAX mark, refer to page 240.
BMW X5: you can operate your vehicle on
uphill and downhill gradients with a maxi-
mum slope of 50%.
>On very steep downhill slopes, use Hill
Descent Control HDC, refer to page 90.
BMW X5: it is possible to start off on inclines
of up to 33%. The permissible body roll is
50%.
>While driving, watch carefully for obstacles
such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these
obstacles whenever possible.
>Make sure that the undercarriage does not
touch the ground, for example on crests and
bumpy roads. The ground clearance of the
vehicle is a maximum of approx. 8 in/20 cm.
Please note that the ground clearance can
vary depending on loading and the driving
conditions of the vehicle.
>Only drive through road surface water up to
a maximum water depth of
>BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
>BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
and only drive at walking speed; do not
remain stationary.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 135 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
136
>After driving through water at low speed,
lightly press the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking
effect from being reduced by wetness.
>Depending on the condition of the surface,
it may be practical to briefly activate DTC,
refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on
page 89.
>If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress
the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the
driving stability control systems can distrib-
ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
Please note the following points after driving on
poor roads to maintain the driving safety of your
BMW:
>Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
>Clean mud, snow, ice etc. from the wheels
and tires and check the tires for damage.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 136 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 137 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 138 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 139 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation system
140
Navigation system
General information
With the help of satellites, the navigation sys-
tem is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti-
nation you enter.
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data and an activation code can be
obtained from your BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Center.
Updating the data can take several hours,
depending on the volume of data.
>The data are updated as you drive.
>The updating process continues automati-
cally when you resume driving.
>All functions remain available as you drive.
>Data are stored on the hard drive or in the
internal memory.
>After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.
>The medium with the navigation data can
be removed after the update.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert navigation DVDs into the DVD player
with the printed side up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
3. Enter the activation code of the navigation
DVDs and switch DVDs if necessary.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press the button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-
sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.
Displaying information on the version
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information on the data version is displayed.
*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 140 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
>Entering a destination manually, see below
>Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 143
>Last destinations, refer to page 144
>Special destinations, refer to page 144
>Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 146
>Selecting home address, refer to page 144
>Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 147
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you can endanger the vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 149. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically, so that stored names can
be called up quickly.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
>If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
>You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city, or select letters.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 141 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
142
Delete letters, if necessary:
>To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
>To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
>To enter spaces:
Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
2. Move the controller to the right.
3. Select the name of the town/city from the
list. The three destinations stored last are
displayed.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight postal code: a preview map is dis-
played.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without entering a
town/city of destination. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. "In" the state/province currently displayed.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
9. Select the street.
Entering house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 142 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Selection after destination entry
>"Accept destination"
Destination guidance starts immediately.
>"Route preference"
refer to page 150.
>"Points of Interest at loc."
refer to page 144.
If a new town/city is selected during destination
guidance, the current destination guidance is
terminated.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 213.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses are not dis-
played by the mobile phone, then they must
first be checked as destinations, refer to
page 214.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces-
sary, using "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 143 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
144
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 213.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
Destination guidance is started.
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Accessing last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
Destination guidance is started.
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to the corresponding location.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Accessing search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 144 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
1. "Search area"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
>"At current location"
>"At destination"
>"At a different destination"
>"Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.
Category details
For some special destinations, it is possible to
display additional details that are recorded in
the navigation data, e.g. restaurant type: Italian.
"Category details"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search" after the criteria have been
defined.
2. A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
>Special destinations "At current loca-
tion" are listed according to their dis-
tance from the current location and are
displayed with a directional arrow point-
ing to the destination.
>Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map display as sym-
bols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
>Special destinations "At destination",
"At a different destination", "Along
route" are listed according to their dis-
tance from the location where the search
is being performed.
3. Highlight the special destination: the desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol: "Start guidance".
6. If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Destination entry using BMW Assist*
The concierge service, refer to page 216,
selects a desired address and transmits it for
direct adoption into the navigation system.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Open "BMW Assist dest. entry".
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max-
imum of 100 entries.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 145 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
146
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight the special destination. The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol: "Start guidance".
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Importing special destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Import (USB)" via the USB interface in
the glove compartment or "Import (BMW
Search)"*
Deleting special destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete my Points of Interest"
5. "Yes"
Entering the destination via
map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Accessing map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol. The interactive map is
started.
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
>Changing scale: turn the controller.
>Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
>Shifting map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the corresponding direction and
turn the controller.
3. Press the controller to display other menu
items.
4. If you wish, select the symbol:
"Start guidance".
Specifying the street
If the system does not detect any street, then a
street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of
the destination are displayed.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 146 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
>Select the symbol: "Start guidance".
>"Exit interactive map"
>Map display
>"Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
>"Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
>"Find points of interest", refer to
page 144.
Entering destination via
voice*
General information
You can enter a desired destination with the
voice activation system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice command system for this pur-
pose if necessary.
You can use {Voice commands} to have
the possible commands read aloud to
you.<
Speaking the entry aloud
>Countries, towns/cities, streets, and inter-
sections can be either spoken aloud as an
entire words or spelled in the system lan-
guage, refer to page 22.
>Town/city, street, and house number can
also be spoken aloud in one sentence.
>Spell the entry if the language of the area is
different from the system language.
>Speak the letters smoothly and avoid
excessive emphasis and pauses.
Entering an address
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for the system prompt.
4. Say the desired address in the suggested
form.
5. Continue entering as prompted by the sys-
tem.
6. If necessary, say the parts of the address
individually, e.g. town/city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as an
entire word*.
The entry possibilities depend on the par-
ticular navigation data as well as the
country and language settings.<
2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/
city.
3. Say the name of the town/city or if neces-
sary, spell at least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit-
ies are suggested.
2. {Enter address}
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
4. Select city/town:
>Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
>Select other city/town: {New entry}
>Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 2}
>Spell the entry: {Spell city}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 147 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
148
Similar-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be differentiated by the system are
compiled in a separate list and displayed as a
town/city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
using iDrive: turn the controller until the desired
town/city is displayed and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
way as the town/city.
Entering house number
You can enter house numbers up to the
number 999:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
and is displayed in the list of last destinations.
Trip planner
The trip planner can be used to plan a trip with
several legs to different destinations.
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol: "Guidance"
4. "Enter new destination"
5. "Enter address"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. "Enter address using:"
3. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted: "Reposition
dest. in the trip".
5. If applicable, select "Add as another dest.".
Starting the trip
After all of the intermediate destinations are
entered, access a stored trip directly "Accept
destination" or via "Stored trips".
Storing a trip
Up to 30 planned trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number and
start destination guidance.
{Start guidance}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 148 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Changing trips
These functions are not available for imported
trips.
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Destination in the trip"
2. Select an intermediate destination.
3. Select option:
>Shift the intermediate destination in the
list:
"Reposition dest. in the trip"
>Delete intermediate destination:
"Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Stored trips"
2. Select the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Word-matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the
basis for instant response. The user benefits
include:
>Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another coun-
try.
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
>When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
>The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 149 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
150
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
When the route has been calculated, it is dis-
played in the map on the Control Display.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached at the end of
the last trip, the system asks whether it should
continue destination guidance.
Select "Resume guidance" or "Stop guidance".
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The road type is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
>"Fast route": a route that is time-opti-
mized by combining the shortest possi-
ble distance and route segments that
can be driven quickly
>"Efficient route": an optimized combina-
tion of the fastest possible route with a
short route
>"Short route": short distance without
taking time into account
>"Alternative routes": suggestions of
other alternative routes with destination
guidance running
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
>Avoid highways where possible:
"Avoid highways"
>Avoid toll roads where possible:
"Avoid toll roads"
>Avoid ferries where possible:
"Avoid ferries"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 150 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
various views of the route are available during
destination guidance.
>Map display
>Arrow display
>Display of the streets and towns/cities on
the route
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis-
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle-
tins are displayed for each route section.
>Display a list of the streets and towns/cities
on the route.
>Display the traffic bulletins and the driving
distance for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mile-
age.
5. Press the controller.
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed: "Remove blocking".
Gas station recommendations
The vehicle calculates the range and recom-
mends several gas stations along the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol to start destination
guidance.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 151 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
152
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory button, refer to
page 20.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting the volume of voice
instructions*
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map display
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map display:
Information in the map display:
>Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
>Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
>Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions switched on
Voice instructions switched off
Symbol Function
Displaying the destination and
starting/terminating destination
guidance
Switching voice instructions on/off
Changing route criteria or select-
ing route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map display
Changing scale
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 152 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Viewing the map
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select a setting:
>"View facing north"
>"View in dir. of travel"
>"Perspective view"
>"Arrow display"
3. Press the controller.
Changing map scale
Select interactive map.
>Moving map: move the controller in the cor-
responding direction.
>Shifting map diagonally: move the control-
ler in the corresponding direction and turn
the controller.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to change the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map display facing north, turn the control-
ler in any direction until AUTO is displayed as
the map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map display
The map appears on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
3. Set the optimum map view.
>"Day/night mode"
Select according to lighting conditions
and make adjustments. This setting is
disregarded when the traffic info map is
activated.
>"Satellite images"
Satellite images* are displayed,
depending on availability and resolution.
>"Perspective view in 3D"
Shows a three-dimensional depiction.
Prominent landmarks contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map
in 3D.
>"Traffic Info map"
Split screen settings
The map settings for the split screen can be
created separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Select the settings:
>"Arrow display"
>"View facing north"
>"View in dir. of travel"
>"Perspective view"
>"Exit ramp view"
Changing scale
1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Turn the controller.
Traffic information*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes-
sage Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually using iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map dis-
play.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 153 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
154
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con-
ditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is." Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA is aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic bulle-
tins relevant to your planned route are automat-
ically shown. Whether destination guidance is
active or not, you can have the traffic informa-
tion displayed in the map view or in the traffic
info list.
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map display.
Opening traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
6. Select a traffic bulletin.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 154 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
3. To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic info map is activated, the pic-
ture on the Control Display is switched to a
grayscale. This permits an optimized depiction
of traffic information. The day/night mode is dis-
regarded in this setting.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. Activate "Traffic Info map":
The map is optimized to display traffic infor-
mation. Symbols for the special destina-
tions are no longer displayed.
Symbols in map view
The symbols of traffic obstructions are dis-
played differently, depending on the scale of
the map and location of the traffic obstruction in
relation to the route.
>Smaller map scale, e.g. 1 mile/2 km: white
sign with the traffic obstruction symbol
>Larger map scale, e.g. 50 miles/100 km:
white sign with an arrow in the relevant
direction
Additional information in the map
display
Depending on the map scale, the length, direc-
tion, and effects of a traffic obstruction are
depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by
bars along the planned route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired category.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed.
>Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
>For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa-
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 155 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
156
Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, tak-
ing into consideration traffic obstructions and
road types.
Selecting a detour
You can set whether individual traffic obstruc-
tions or all of them are taken into account in the
route planning.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select the traffic obstruction that is to be
taken into consideration.
4. "Activate detour"
Taking into consideration all traffic
obstructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
3. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary.
"Dynamic guidance" is automatically activated.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 156 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
>the current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is best when you have an unob-
structed view to the sky.
>the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
>the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
>the letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
Stored data do not contain the data of the
destination. Select a destination that is as
close as possible to the original.
>the map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to
a grayscale. This permits an optimized
depiction of traffic information.
>Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 157 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 158 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio and CD as well as their
tone settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 159 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
160
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
>Radio
>CD/DVD player
>CD/DVD changer*
>Video
>External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using:
>Buttons near the CD/DVD player
>iDrive
>Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
>Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
>Voice activation system
Buttons near the CD/DVD player
1Sound output for entertainment on/off,
volume
>Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
>Turn: adjust volume
2 Ejecting CD/DVD
3CD/DVD drive
4 Station scan/track search
>Change the radio station
>Select track for CD/DVD player and CD/
DVD changer and certain multimedia
devices
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this pur-
pose.
Adjusting volume
Turn button 1 next to the CD/DVD player until
the desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 160 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Treble, bass, balance, fader
>"Balance": left/right volume distribution
>"Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multichannel playback, surround*
You can choose between stereo and multichan-
nel playback, surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
Multichannel playback, surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
vated, depending on the audio track selected.
Volume
>"Speed volume": adaptation of the volume
as a function of vehicle speed
>"PDC"*: volume of the PDC signal tone in
comparison to entertainment sound output
>"Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the safety belt reminder, in comparison to
entertainment sound output
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 161 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
162
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 162 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
>FM and AM
>HD Radio*
>Weather Radio*
>satellite radio*
Selecting a station
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or
press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11.
Selecting frequency manually
In "Manual", you can set stations that are being
received in addition to those being displayed.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. In the "AM" band, select from among
"AM"*, "AM", and "AM".
5. Call up the frequency.
6. To store the station: press the controller.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 163 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Radio
164
Storing stations
Using iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the controller again.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The station is stored.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Using programmable memory buttons
You can store a station on the programmable
memory buttons, refer to page 20.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio*
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with improved sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Any time
shift between these two broadcasts can lead to
repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 164 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
Stored stations
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Call up the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the program-
mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Weather Radio*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather
reports are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated every 1 to 3 hours, more
frequently as needed. Most stations operate 24
hours a day. In case of a storm, the National
Weather Service interrupts the routine weather
news and transmits special warning messages
instead. If you have a question about NOAA
Weather Radio, please contact the nearest
office of the National Weather Service. Details
are also provided on the Internet at
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Accessing weather news flashes
Operating via iDrive:
1. Switch on radio.
2. "Weather band"
3. Selecting desired channel.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 165 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Satellite radio
166
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.
Navigation bar
The functions of the symbols of the navigation
bar can also be stored on the programmable
memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.
Activating channels
The category Unsubscribed Channels includes
all channels that are not activated.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Categories"
4. Select the category Unsubscribed Chan-
nels.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.
This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels once more.
Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
*
Symbol Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Accessing favorites, selecting
the My Favorites category
Managing favorites
Traffic Jump
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 166 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to activated channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Using iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
Using the button near the CD/DVD
player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Using direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Select channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is displayed and press the controller.
Storing channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again in order to con-
firm selection of the highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the pro-
grammable memory buttons, refer to page. 20.
Change list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information about the channel is displayed.
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 167 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Satellite radio
168
Select category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Categories"
4. Select the desired category.
Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel cur-
rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
cache memory. The signal must be available.
The stored audio track can be played back at a
different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if
a new channel is selected.
Accessing Time shift
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Replay - Time Shift"
A new window appears in the display.
>The red arrow indicates the current play-
back position.
>The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.
>During a live broadcast, "live" is displayed
next to the cache memory bar.
Time shift menu
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track,
game, league, and team.
Storing artist, track, or game
Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor-
ites. The channel information must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.
Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
Symbol Function
Go to live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 168 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
Accessing favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, then the
message "Playing favorite!" appears for
approx. 20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the message is
being displayed.
The displayed favorite will be played.
If it receives no notification, the system
switches into the My Favorites category. All of
the favorites currently being broadcast can be
selected from a list.
Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated glo-
bally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few min-
utes.
Selecting region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set Jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 169 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Satellite radio
170
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take sev-
eral minutes.
Notes
>Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environ-
mental or topographical conditions. The
satellite radio has no influence on this.
>The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, moun-
tains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 170 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting CD/DVD
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automati-
cally pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files can take a few minutes to read, depending
on their directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
>DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
>CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
>Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer*
>CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
DVD changer*
>DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video, CD: CD-
ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD
Starting playback
Using iDrive
Fill and insert CD/DVD magazine, refer to
page 175.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
*
Symbol Function
CD/DVD player
CD/DVD changer
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 171 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
172
Audio playback
Selecting a track
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files*
It is possible that not all of the characters on the
CD/DVD will be correctly displayed, depending
on the data.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
5. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
>Artist
>Album title
>Track number on the CD/DVD
>Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks of the current CD/DVD are played
once in a random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 172 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic replay*
Selected tracks, directories, or CDs/DVDs are
automatically replayed.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h;
in certain country-specific equipment configu-
rations, the video image will only display if the
hand brake is engaged.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD starts to play.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East,
South Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South Amer-
ica, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0 All regions
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 173 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
174
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
The Video menu is displayed:
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
>To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
>To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
Settings for DVD/VCD
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu*
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 174 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
175
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting title
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD/DVD changer*
The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is
accommodated in the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1Emptying CD/DVD compartments
2LEDs under the CD/DVD slot
flash when CDs/DVDs can be inserted.
3Buttons for CD/DVD compartments
The LED lights up when a CD/DVD is in the
compartment.
4CD/DVD slot
5Loading CD/DVD compartments
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 175 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
176
Loading CD/DVD changer
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another CD/DVD compartment if so
desired:
Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 2 under the CD/DVD slot
flash, insert a single CD/DVD into the mid-
dle.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in and
placed into the selected CD/DVD compart-
ment.
Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs 2
under the CD/DVD slot are flashing;
otherwise, you may damage the CD/DVD or
the CD/DVD changer.
Do not push on the CDs/DVDs; they may
jam and no longer eject properly.<
4. To load additional CD/DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Filling empty CD/DVD compartments
1. Hold down the button.
The LEDs on the empty CD/DVD compart-
ments flash.
2. When the LEDs 2 under the CD/DVD slot
flash, insert a single CD/DVD into the mid-
dle.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in and
placed into the first empty CD/DVD com-
partment.
Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs 2
under the CD/DVD slot are flashing;
otherwise, you may damage the CD/DVD or
the CD/DVD changer.
Do not push on the CDs/DVDs; they may
jam and no longer eject properly.<
3. Wait until the CD/DVD has been pulled in.
4. To load additional CD/DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 2 and 3.
After filling, it can take a few minutes to read the
CDs/DVDs.
Removing CDs/DVDs individually
1. Press the button.
2. Press the ... button to select the
CD/DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is slid a short distance out
from the CD/DVD changer.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
If the CD is not removed, it will be pulled
back in again after approx. 10 seconds.<
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold down the button.
The CDs/DVDs will be slid out a short dis-
tance out from the CD/DVD changer, in
sequence.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as other-
wise the CD/DVD or the adapter my jam and no
longer eject properly.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus,
otherwise the CD/DVD may jam and no longer
eject properly.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 176 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
177
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat-
ents and the intellectual property of the Macro-
vision Corporation and other manufacturers.
Use of this copyrighted material must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro-
tection may only be used for private purposes.
The copying of this technology is strictly forbid-
den.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 177 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Music collection
178
Music collection
Music, storing
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.
>Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
>CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC
formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disk.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan-
dard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5,987,525, 6,061,680, 6,154,773, 6,161,132,
6,230,192, 6,230,207, 6,240,459, and
6,330,593 as well as other granted or pending
patents. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo
are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored by the CD/DVD
player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player, otherwise the storage process will be
interrupted.
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 178 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
179
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove com-
partment.
>Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
>Unsuitable devices: USB hard disks, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 179 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Music collection
180
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
>Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
>Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, select that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 180 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
181
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
the album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a directory or track
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
the directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 181 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Music collection
182
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 182 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
183
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
External devices
AUX-IN connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via
iDrive.
Connecting
Open the lid of the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks through the vehicle's
speaker system, connect the headphone or
line-out port of the device with the AUX-IN con-
nection.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Using iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "AUX front"
Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. Then say "External devices" if applicable.
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
USB-audio interface*/
extended connectivity of
music player in mobile
phone*
It is possible to connect external audio devices/
mobile phones. They can be operated using
iDrive. Sound is output on the vehicle loud-
speakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
>Connection via USB audio interface:
Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g.
MP3 players, USB memory sticks, or
mobile phones that are supported by the
USB audio interface.
>Connection via snap-in adapter*, refer to
page 212, when equipped with expanded
connection of the music player in the mobile
phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Play-
back is possible only if no audio device/
mobile phone is connected to the USB-
audio interface.
Due to the vast array of audio devices/mobile
phones on the market, it is not possible to
assure that every audio device/mobile phone
can be operated via the vehicle.
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center,
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 183 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
External devices
184
which audio devices/mobile phones are com-
patible.
Audio files
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Connecting via USB-audio interface
Open the lid of the center armrest.
1AUX-IN connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use the special cable adapter for Apple iPods/
iPhones, which you can obtain from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center. The cable
adapter is required for a proper connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the AUX-IN
connection and USB interface 1 using the cable
adapter for Apple iPod/iPhone.
The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is
supported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
When connecting the device use a flexi-
ble adapter cable, to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
Connect the USB device to connector 2, using
a flexible adapter cable.
When the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This process can
take some time. The time required is dependent
on the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be
accessed via the file directory.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about
16,000 tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
The playback starts with the first track. If an
Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in
adapter while an audio device is connected to
the AUX-IN connection at the same time, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN connection will be
played.
Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
>Artist
>Album title
>Number of tracks
>Track file name
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 184 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
185
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Track search
You can access the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
access the tracks via the file directory.
Selection is possible via:
>Playback lists
>Information: type of music, artist, album,
title
>Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-
ist".
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" can be used to find specific entries.
>Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
>Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed. Not all catego-
ries need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, select
that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist
are then displayed.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper-
ating manual of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may be damaged, impairing driv-
ing safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 185 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
External devices
186
Information on connection
>The connected audio device is supplied
with a current of max. 500 mA, if the device
supports this. Therefore, do not connect
the device to the power socket in the vehi-
cle.
>Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
>Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
>Do not connect USB hard disks.
>Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 186 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
187
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
DVD system in rear
With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image
data. The DVD system can also play data from
attached external audio and video devices.
Audio output is possible both via headphones
and via the vehicle speakers.
You can control the DVD system using the but-
tons on the CD-/DVD player or using the remote
control.
You operate some functions using the
remote control.<
Enabling DVD system
The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. "Rear DVD system active"
DVD-System is enabled.
Controls
1Display screen
2Infrared interface for headphones
3CD/DVD player
4Headphone connection:
Jack 1/8 in/3.5 mm
512 V sockets, refer to page 121
Folding in display screen
When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be dam-
aged.
When the screen is folded down, do not
open the lid of the center arm rest or rest
your arm on the screen; otherwise, you may
damage the screen.<
*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 187 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
188
1. Turn display screen, arrow 1.
The display screen switches off.
2. Fold in display screen, arrow 2.
The display screen is folded out in the reverse
order.
CD/DVD player
Controls
1Press: switching the DVD system on and off
Rotate: left headset volume and vehicle vol-
ume
2Ejecting CD/DVD
3Start track
Stop
Playback, pause, freeze-frame
Next track
4CD/DVD slot
5Connection for external device: RCA jacks
6Press: switching the DVD system on and off
Rotate: right headset volume and vehicle
volume
Connecting headphones
You can connect headphones with a phone jack
1/8 in/3.5 mm or operate them using the infra-
red interface.
To enable optimal use of the infrared interface,
use infrared headphones that comply with the
IEC 61603-2 standard.
>Compatible infrared headphones and infor-
mation about supported headphones are
available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Center.
When using infrared headphones, it is
important not to interrupt the infrared
connection between the headphones and the
infrared interface, refer to page 187. This
means that no obstacle should come between
the two and that the cover of the infrared inter-
face should not be covered or scratched. Unfa-
vorable lighting conditions such as glare from
outside can interfere with reception.<
Remote control
1Menu navigation
2Volume for headphones with jack plug
3Changing track or chapter during CD-,
DVD- or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind
4Headphones right/left
5Open start menu for DVD system
Menu navigation
You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to
navigate through the menus.
>Turn the thumbwheel:
To select a menu item.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 188 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
189
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
>Press the arrow buttons:
To switch between windows.
>Press the button:
To activate the menu item.
The transmission time of the remote control is
limited in accordance with legal guidelines. A
function can be repeated by pressing or turning
the appropriate button or knob.
Changing batteries
1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and installa-
tion position are marked on the bottom of
the battery compartment.
3. Close the cover.
Return old batteries to a collection point
or to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
Setting the language of the
DVD system
1. Select a CD/DVD track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select "Tone".
4. Press the button.
5. Switch to the top window.
6. Select "Language".
7. Press the button.
8. Select the desired language.
9. Press the button.
Sound output via speakers
In addition to the headphones, you can also play
the sound via the vehicle speakers.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. "AUX/rear"
Switching DVD system on/off
Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or
under the desired screen.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.
Playing CD/DVD
Use the following menu items to access data
from a CD/DVD:
>Video data via "DVD"
>Audio data via "CD"
>Pictures via "Photo".
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 189 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
190
Playing videos from CDs/
DVDs
Country codes of DVDs
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod-
ing of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The
country codes supported by your DVD are con-
tained in the information on your DVD.
An overview of the coding zones:
DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all
devices.<
Starting playback
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
>Playback begins automatically after a
few seconds.
>If it does not:
Select "DVD".
Press the button.
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific
menu is displayed when a DVD is inserted,
use the remote control buttons for menu
navigation to select the desired option.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
You can control the playback with the buttons
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Video-CDs, VCDs, and Super-Video-
CDs, i.e. SVCDs, can only be played if
they do not have a DVD-specific menu.<
Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
DVD control
With the DVD control, you can select the title
and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and
operate functions such as Language, Fast for-
ward and Reverse or Freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible
to operate the DVD control under these circum-
stances. In this case, try to make the selection
using the DVD-specific menu.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Press the buttons on the remote control
or turn the thumbwheel to select the
desired function.
3. Press the button.
The DVD control disappears again after a short
time if you have not selected a function.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
Symbol Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVD
Starting playback
Stop playback
Activate and deactivate
freeze frame
Skipping chapter
Fast forward/reverse
"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 190 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
191
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Or:
Press the button on the remote control to
exit the DVD control.
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
4. Press the button several times to
increase the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse with remote control
Press and hold the button until you reach
the desired point.
Or:
1. During playback, turn the thumbwheel.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel.
The speed is increased.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
DVD will start play at the point selected.
Skipping chapter
You can change to the next or previous chapter
during playback.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing
until you reach the desired chapter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach the
desired chapter.
Freeze frame
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
To continue playback:
1. Select the or symbol.
2. Press the button.
As an alternative, you can also stop and con-
tinue playback with the button on the CD/
DVD player.
Making settings for DVD
1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
>"Video settings":
>"Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
the screen
>After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Language":
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 191 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
192
The system language of the DVD sys-
tem
"Display": background brightness of
screen.
>"Tone":
>"Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
>"Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
>"DVD format":
>"Standard"
>"Zoom": full-screen playback
>"Language":
Language of the DVD playback. The lan-
guage advances one setting each time the
menu item is selected.
>"Subtitles":
Language of subtitles
or turn off subtitles
>"Title":
Selecting individual tracks on the DVD
>"Angle of view":
Camera angle
Notes or symbols that appear during the
playback of a film generally point out differ-
ent camera angles. These are usually only
briefly available.
>"Menu":
Call up the DVD-specific menu.
>"Return":
Exit menu or:
Press the buttons on the remote con-
trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari-
ous languages or scene descriptions for the
hearing impaired. These functions are stored
on the DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to
select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu.
Consult the information accompanying your
DVD.<
Opening the DVD-specific menu
Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
It is thus possible, for example, to select from
among several possible actions or to access
information about the film.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select "Menu".
3. Press the button.
On some DVDs, you can use "Main
menu" and "Title" to access addi-
tional menus in which you can select maga-
zine segments about the music scene, for
example.<
To make a selection:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button until the desired func-
tion is selected.
3. Select the arrow.
4. Press the button.
To return to the start menu:
1. Select the arrow.
2. Press the button.
You can also select language, subtitles,
camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu.
Consult the information accompanying your
DVD.<
Compressed video files
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 192 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
193
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Playback functions
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a menu item:
>"Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
>"Repeat track":
Repeat selected track.
>"Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current direc-
tory.
4. Press the button.
Playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD
Starting playback
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automati-
cally pulled in.
>Playback begins automatically after a few
seconds.
>If it does not:
Select "CD".
Press the button.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to
page 194, can take approx. 1 minute to read,
depending on their directory structure.
To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to
Compressed audio files page 194.
To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:
1. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
2. Select "CD".
3. Press the button.
As an alternative, you can also control the play-
back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
To eject CD/DVD:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD/DVD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 193 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
194
Using the remote control
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel
until you reach the desired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Settings and playback functions for
audio CDs
1. Select "SET".
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
>"Tone":
>"Treble / Bass" and "Balance": sepa-
rately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and infrared headphones.
>"Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
>"Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
>"Random":
The tracks of the CD are played back once
in random sequence.
>"Scan":
Brief samples of all tracks on the CD are
automatically played one after another.
>"Repeat":
Repeat the current track. Select again to
end.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Compressed audio files
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 194 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
195
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Settings and playback functions for
compressed audio files
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
>"Tone":
>"Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
>"Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
>"Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
>"Scan directory":
Briefly sample the tracks in the current
directory.
>"Scan all":
Briefly sample all tracks.
>"Random directory":
Play the tracks in the current directory in a
random sequence.
>"Random all":
Play all tracks in a random sequence.
>"Repeat track":
Repeat the selected track.
>"Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current directory.
>"Details":
Display any stored information on the cur-
rent track.
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
Displaying images from
CD/DVD
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
3. Select "Photo".
4. Press the button.
Displaying overview
1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.
2. Select "Overview".
3. Press the button.
It may take some time until the overview is com-
pletely displayed.
If a symbol appears instead of an image,
the image cannot be displayed in the
overview.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 195 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
196
Displaying images
1. Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the
remote control to select an image.
2. Press the button.
3. Displaying images:
>Scroll using the menu navigation but-
tons of the remote control
>Show slide show:
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust how long
each image is displayed.
Stop slide show:
Select "Stop
Adjusting
1. Press the button.
2. Select a menu item:
3. Press the button.
Ending display
1. Press the button.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Information on CD/DVD
player
Safety notes
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1
laser product. Do not operate if the cover
is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can
result.<
Suitable media
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with
labels applied as these can become
detached during playback due to heat buildup
and can cause irreparable damage to the
device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm.
Do not play CDs/DVDs using an adapter, e.g.
CD singles; otherwise, the CD may jam and no
longer eject properly.
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus or
hybrid discs; otherwise, the CD/DVD may jam
and no longer eject properly.<
The CD/DVD player can play the following
media:
>Video DVD
>CD-DA (Audio CD)
Symbol Function
Return to the photo menu
"SET" Adjust the screen "Display".
"Language": after switching to
the top window, you can
change the system language.
Start slide show
Display first/last picture of the
current directory
Rotate image by 90°
"Overview" Change to image overview
Symbol Function
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 196 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
197
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
>CDs/DVDs with compressed image data
>CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data
>CDs/DVDs with compressed video data
The DVD player does not support DVD audio.
However, many audio DVDs available in stores
also contain a video track in the DVD Video for-
mat in addition to the audio track. These DVDs
can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to
the information on your DVD to determine
whether your audio DVD contains an additional
video track. Depending on the authoring used, it
is possible that not all functions are available
during playback.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers
are coated on both sides and bear no markings.
This means both sides are information carriers.
To play the information on the other side, turn
over the DVD.
Supported formats
Depending on the compression method used,
not all files of the specified formats can be
opened.
Images
JPEG/JPG
With very large image files, it can take longer for
the images to be displayed.
Compressed audio files
>MP3
>WMA
>OGG
>AAC
Compressed video files
>SVCD
>MPEG1
>MPEG2
>MPEG4/DivX
Digital Rights Management (DRM)
In some cases, it may not be possible to play
CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Man-
agement (DRM).
General malfunctions
The BMW CD/DVD player is optimized for oper-
ation in the vehicle. It may react more sensi-
tively to defective CDs/DVDs than devices
intended for stationary use.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Make sure that no foreign objects or liq-
uids get into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise,
the CD/DVD player will be damaged.<
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with copied
or self-recorded CDs/DVDs may include incon-
sistent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or significant aging of the CD/DVD
blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506 or to high humidity levels or
direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. As a result,
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 197 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
198
some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be
played to a limited degree, or cause the system
to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and
then switch the system back on again. Then
remove the CD/DVD from the drive.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
not match the language of the music track, the
music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
Care instructions
More information about this can be found under
Care, starting on page 246.
External device
Connecting
1Connections for audio/video cables:
Watch the colors of the sockets when con-
necting.
Yellow socket: video
White socket: audio left
Red socket: audio right
2Power supply for external device: socket
with removable cap, also refer to page 121.
Playback
1. Switch on the external device and start the
playback.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
3. Select "AUX".
4. Press the button.
For devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3
players, "No video signal" appears in the dis-
play. The sound is nevertheless played.
Settings for external devices
1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
>"Video settings":
>"Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
video playback
>"NTSC color":
The color can be adjusted on an external
device with the NTSC standard.
>"Standard":
The DVD system can be adapted to
external devices with different TV stan-
dards; to do so, consult the instruction
manual of the external device.
>"Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 198 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
199
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
>"Tone":
>"Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
>"Reset":
Your settings are reset.
>After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the exter-
nal device to the volume of the CD/DVD
player.
"Language":
the system language of the DVD system
"Display":
background brightness of screen.
>"Video Format":
>"Standard"
>"Zoom": full-screen playback
To exit from the menu:
Press the buttons on the remote control.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 199 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 200 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices.
Communications
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 201 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
202
Telephone
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone using iDrive, the but-
tons on the steering wheel, or voice com-
mands*.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. The pairing
data of up to four mobile phones can be stored
simultaneously. If several mobile phones are
detected simultaneously, the respective last
mobile phone paired can be operated via the
vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile
phones snap-in adapters are offered for.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center which mobile phones with Bluetooth
interface are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package and which mobile phones
are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By vir-
tue of their particular software versions, these
mobile phones support the functions described
in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions can occur
with other mobile phones.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone using:
>Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
>iDrive, refer to page 16
>Voice commands*, refer to page 209
>Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.
Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
>Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full mobile phone
preparation package. Information on this
subject is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
>The mobile phone is ready to operate.
>Bluetooth has been activated in the vehicle,
refer to page 204, and on the mobile phone.
*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 202 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
203
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
>Depending on the mobile phone, certain
settings may be necessary on the mobile
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
>Bluetooth activated
>Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
>Reconnect
>Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
>For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16-
digit number as a Bluetooth passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers the best protection against unautho-
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required following successful pair-
ing.
>The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi-
cle stationary, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth"
5. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
6. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen-
dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat-
ing instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
>Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 203 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
204
>It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Checking if pairing is unsuccessful
>Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth
>Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
>Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then
repeat the pairing procedure.
>Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
>The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. "Telephone"
3. "Bluetooth"
4. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com-
puter.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 204 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
205
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
>Accepting/refusing a call
>dialing phone numbers
>Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
>Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
>Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev-
eral minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full prepara-
tion package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize the
speech quality during a call, we recommend
that you:
>Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or pointing the
open front air vents downward.
>Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem.
Requirements
>The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
>The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
>The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 205 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
206
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select this symbol to establish the con-
nection
or
press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service pro-
vider.
Calls with multiple parties
You can switch between calls and combine two
calls to a single conference call. These func-
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider, and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
>Active call: indicated by a red handset
>Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this hand-
set.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 206 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
207
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.
Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts* and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.
Dialing the number using iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a des-
tination.
Mobile phone
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 207 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
208
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness" or "Mobile".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store in vehicle"
Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis-
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Store contact"
Dialing a number
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness" or "Mobile".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"
Messages
Various types of messages can be displayed:
>SMS
Whether or not SMS are displayed depends
on whether transmission to the vehicle is
supported by the mobile phone. SMS may
not be supported by the service provider, or
the function may need to be enabled sepa-
rately.
>My Info messages from the BMW Assist
portal.
>Messages from BMW Concierge service
Displaying messages
1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
3. Select the desired message.
SMS
To call the sender of an SMS:
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Call sender"
To store the sender in the contacts:
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
My Info
Replying:
Sending a predefined reply.
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Answer"
To start destination guidance:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
To dial the number in the message:
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 208 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
209
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
1. Select the message that contains the
desired number.
2. "Call"
Messages from the concierge service
To use the address in destination guidance*:
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
To dial a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
To save an address:
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message"
Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys-
tem when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,
the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:
Depending on the mobile phone model used,
the conversation can be continued via the
hands-free system if necessary. Refer to the
display on your mobile phone and/or your
mobile phone's operating instructions.
From handsfree system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link, refer to page 204.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 205.
Voice commands
Activating system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 209 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
210
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
{Cancel}.
{Voice commands}.
{Dial number} or {Choose name}.
You say The voice control answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890}Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}
{Dialing}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dialing}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 210 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
211
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, it is not possible to
use voice command either to call phone num-
bers stored in the mobile phone or to store new
numbers. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An
entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Creating and editing a voice phone
book
Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Have entries read aloud and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
>Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-
mal volume, avoiding excessive emphases
and pauses.
>Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambi-
ent noise.
>Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
{Delete}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Speak the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
1. {Choose name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
{Redial}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 211 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Telephone
212
Inserting/removing the snap-
in adapter*
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
To conserve vehicle battery power, you
should avoid using the mobile phone
when the ignition is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 212 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
213
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
of the mobile phone* are also displayed. The
addresses can be used as destinations for nav-
igation and the phone numbers can be dialed.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-
gation system, it is only possible to
enter addresses that are contained in the
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.<
6. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as home address
A contact can be stored as a home address. It is
placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store as home address"
When the home address is deleted, only the
content of the home address entry is deleted
and not the entry itself.
My contacts
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone*.
Displaying contacts
"My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 213 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Contacts
214
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Displaying the detailed view*
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Selecting a contact as navigation
destination
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking a destination address
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con-
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be corrected to match
the navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the con-
tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. "Store contact in "My contacts"""
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the
changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A
copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and
only this copy is displayed.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 214 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
215
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request* is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
After the BMW Assist system has been deacti-
vated, no BMW Assist service will be available.
The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after a
new contract has been signed.
Requirements
>The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in on a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit-
ting the services.
>To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
>To activate and update BMW Assist, a
GPS signal must be available.
>The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
>BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
>Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
>Automatic Collision Notification: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
>Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle and
position data are transmitted in the process.
>Customer Relations: connection to Cus-
tomer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
>TeleServices: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center, either automatically before a ser-
vice due date or when you request a BMW
service appointment.
>Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
>Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
>In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers a concierge service and information
on route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
>You can also access the BMW Assist con-
cierge service via the Internet.
*
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 215 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
216
TeleServices*
TeleServices supports communication with
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
>Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center. In this way, the
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can
plan its work in advance. This shortens the
duration of the service appointment.
>In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance*.
>The offer varies by country.
>Connection may incur charges.
>Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
>BMW Assist is activated.
>Wireless reception is available.
>The engine is running.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge ser-
vice, you can obtain information about, for
example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy
services, gas stations or hotels, as well as
receive the corresponding telephone numbers
and addresses.
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance*.
Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge service.
You are connected to an employee of the BMW
Concierge service to obtain the required infor-
mation. You can then have the phone number
and address sent to you and, for example, use it
for destination guidance in the navigation sys-
tem. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW concierge service. When an
information message is received, a list of the
received messages is displayed automatically.
Messages
SMS, BMW Concierge service messages and
My Info messages from the BMW Assist portal
are listed here, refer to Messages on page 208.
Roadside assistance
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance*
should you require help in the event of a break-
down.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone* is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 216 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
217
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
Teleservice Diagnosis*
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. Teleservice
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by
Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.
Teleservice Help*
Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire-
less transmission. Teleservice Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.
Starting Teleservice Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of Teleservice Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
Activating BMW Assist*
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
BMW Search is an Internet portal that makes
available a number of services for use in the
vehicle, e.g. information on restaurants on your
route, your own address book or an e-mail
account.
BMW Search is always displayed across the full
screen.
Requirements
>Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
>The vehicle is located within wireless net-
work coverage.
>The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 217 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
218
Using BMW Search
To select and display content:
>Turn the controller to highlight an element.
>Press the controller to display an element.
Opening start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Pairing
To display e-mails, contacts from BMW Search
or other personal data, you need to log in.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Open "Options".
4. "User identification"
5. "User name:"
6. Enter the user name and select "OK".
7. "Password:"
8. Enter the password and select "OK".
9. "OK"
Automatically logging in
You are logged in automatically when
BMW Search is opened.
"Logon automatically"
Logging off
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Open "Options".
4. "User logoff"
Activating TeleServices*
If the services are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Activate TeleService"
Customer Relations
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 218 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
219
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If the vehicle is equipped with the
mobile phone preparation package, a voice
connection is established.
Service Request*
You can send a request to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center to arrange a service
appointment. The Teleservice data is transmit-
ted during a Service Request. Your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center will contact you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The Teleservice data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center prior to the ser-
vice deadline. The center will contact you and a
service appointment can be arranged.
You can check when the BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center*
Address and contact data of the BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Your BMW center"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 219 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
220
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 220 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
221
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 221 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 222 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and roadside assistance.
Mobility
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 223 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Refueling
224
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling.
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and regula-
tions. Never transport reserve fuel containers in
the vehicle. These could become leaky and
cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler door. To do this, briefly
press the lower edge.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket
attached to the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Releasing manually
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler door manually.
1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to
>premature pump shutoff
>a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters
X5 xDrive48i: approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters
reserve
X6 xDrive50i: approx. 3.2 US gal/12 liters
reserve
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 224 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Gasoline engine: required fuel
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
damage to the catalytic converter will
result.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel, otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
>BMW X5: 87
>BMW X6: 89
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
BMW X5 with BMW Advanced Diesel:
required fuel
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with a low sulfur content:
Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-07a.
Only refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel.
The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel
must not exceed 5Ξ, referred to as B5. Do not
refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been
refueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do
not start the engine; otherwise, there is a dan-
ger of engine damage.<
After incorrect refueling, contact a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
The fuel filling neck is designed for refuel-
ing with diesel nozzles.
If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel
filler pipe of your BMW, please check to make
sure that you are refueling with a diesel fuel
pump and whether this is equipped with a diesel
nozzle.<
In the event the ultra-low sulfur diesel
nozzle cannot be fully inserted into the
fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside
Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel.
For more information on BMW Roadside Assis-
tance, refer to page 262.<
Winter diesel
In order to assure the operational reliability of
the diesel engine, during cold seasons, please
refuel with winter diesel, which is sold at filling
stations during this time of year. The standard
fuel filter heating prevents the supply of fuel
from stalling during driving.
Do not mix in any additives or gasoline;
otherwise, there is the risk of engine dam-
age.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 225 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Refueling
226
BMW X5 with BMW Advanced
Diesel
The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides
in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by injecting
the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the
exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chem-
ical reaction occurs that minimizes nitrogen
oxides.
In order to be able to start the engine in the
usual way, there must be a sufficient supply of
diesel exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir.
System heating
In order to bring the system to operating tem-
perature after a cold start of the engine, the
automatic transmission shifts into the next
higher gear at a later point.
Reserve display
A display in the instrument panel informs you
about the remaining distance can be covered
with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
The reserve display appears approx.
1,000 miles/1,600 km before the end of the
tank.
As soon as the reserve display has
appeared in the instrument panel, have
the diesel exhaust fluid refilled to prevent the
engine from being unable to restart.<
Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum
Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will
continue to run, provided that it is not switched
off, and all other operating requirements are
met, e.g. sufficient fuel.
Do not drive until the displayed remaining
distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not
be possible to restart the engine.<
Incorrect fueling
The warning lamp lights up:
The reservoir has been filled with an
incorrect fluid.
Please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Center.
Having diesel exhaust fluid refilled
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center refills
the diesel exhaust fluid as part of the regular
maintenance. If you adhere to this maintenance
schedule, it is usually not necessary to refill any
fluids between the maintenance dates.
Under certain circumstances, e.g. due to a par-
ticularly sporty driving style or operation of the
vehicle at high altitudes, it may be necessary to
refill fluids between maintenance dates.
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
unable to restart.
You can have the fluid refilled by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it may be
necessary to replenish the level of diesel
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 226 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
exhaust fluid at temperatures below +237/
-56 even between the regular maintenance
intervals.
If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indi-
cated with the reserve display in the instrument
panel, refer to page 226.<
Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional circumstances
In order to get your vehicle to reach the nearest
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, you may
refill the diesel exhaust fluid yourself, making
sure to heed the warning notices.
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come
into contact with you. This can lead to
skin and eye irritation. Wear protective goggles
and gloves as needed. Follow the safety
instructions on the bottle.
When opening the bottle or reservoir, pungent
smelling vapors can escape. Before refilling,
close the vehicle completely so that the vapors
do not get into the interior of the vehicle. When
handling diesel exhaust fluid in enclosed
spaces, make sure to have sufficient ventilation.
After handling diesel exhaust fluid, wash hands
thoroughly. Failure to do so may lead to irrita-
tion, e.g. due to inadvertent contact with the
eyes.
If eye irritation occurs, immediately rinse eyes
with ample water and contact a doctor if neces-
sary.
If diesel exhaust fluid comes into contact with
surfaces of your vehicle, rinse the affected sur-
faces with water or else damage may occur.
Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of chil-
dren.<
Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
>Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid.
This bottle and its special adapter permit
convenient refilling with diesel exhaust
fluid.
>Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
You can get diesel exhaust fluid at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Refilling quantity
Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve dis-
play: approx. 0,75 US gal/2.7 liters reserve
Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid
1. Open hood, refer to page 239.
2. Fit releasing tool from onboard tool kit, refer
to page 250 into place and open the lock,
refer to arrow.
Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid
1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it
comes into contact with the stop, refer to
arrow.
2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow.
The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 227 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Refueling
228
3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the
bottle stops changing. It is not possible to
overfill.
Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and unscrew
it.
Closing reservoir
After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the
releasing tool.
After refilling diesel exhaust fluid
Incorrect fluid
After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.
antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do
not start the engine because this could result in
a fire hazard.<
Contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.
Bottle disposal
You can have bottles for diesel exhaust
fluid properly disposed of at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only dispose of empty bottles in your house-
hold garbage if the local legal regulations permit
it.<
Reserve display
After refilling, the reserve continues to appear
after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle
has been driven for a few more minutes, this
display will disappear.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 228 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire*: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. If you fail to observe this pre-
caution, you may be driving on tires with incor-
rect tire pressures, a condition that can not only
compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci-
dent. Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat
tires, except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seri-
ously impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can
lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 94.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW Sports Activ-
ity Vehicle Center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
>Tire sizes of your vehicle
>Load conditions
>Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages.
Otherwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 229 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
230
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 230 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of
seats
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
without sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 33/230 - 35/240 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 33/230 - 36/250
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 39/270
with sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 36/250 35/240 41/280
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 41/280
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 231 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
232
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows
of seats
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 33/230 - 35/240 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 42/290 - 45/310
with sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 41/280 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 38/260 - 48/330
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 33/230 - 41/280 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 39/270 - 48/330
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 42/290 - 49/340
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 232 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL 32/220 35/240 36/250 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 38/260
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 33/230 - 39/270
Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 233 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
234
Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL 33/230 33/230 41/280 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL 36/250 - 42/290 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 36/250 - 44/300 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 36/250 - 44/300
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 36/250 - 45/310 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 45/310
Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 234 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
235
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT ... 0809 indicates that the
tire was manufactured in week 8 of 2009.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
255/55 R 18 109 H
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0809
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 235 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
236
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 237.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base are
distributed over the tire's circumference and
are marked on the side of the tire with TWI –
Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been
driven down to the wear indicators, a tread
depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
tire shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed
there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely
dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 236 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
237
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained
tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce-
ment ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
>With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 93
>With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure page 95
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a tire shop that works according to
BMW repair procedures with correspondingly
trained personnel. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
age and related safety hazards. Make sure that
the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possi-
bly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
When changing to larger wheels and tires,
it may be necessary to make changes to
the wheelwell trim piece, as otherwise road
users could be endangered or the vehicle could
be damaged. Only have this work carried out by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works in accordance with BMW
guidelines and uses appropriately trained per-
sonnel.<
You can ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center for the correct wheel/tire combination.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would other-
wise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC, xDrive,
Dynamic Performance Control in the BMW X6,
or Flat Tire Monitor.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 237 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
238
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 94. Your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you on
this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends using winter tires for opera-
tion on winter road or at temperatures below
+457/+76. Although all-season M+S tires
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they generally fail to provide the same lev-
els of cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Paying attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
Even with tires of the same size, BMW
recommends that you not rotate the front
tires to the rear or vice versa as this can nega-
tively affect handling characteristics.
When the vehicle is equipped with different
tires sizes*, rotating tires from one axle to the
other is not permitted.<
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
can provide you with this information.
BMW X5: use is only permitted in pairs on the
rear wheels with tires of the size:
>255/55 R 18
>255/50 R 19
BMW X6: it is only permissible to use snow
chains in pairs, on the 255/50 R 19 rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not ini-
tialize the Flat Tire Monitor*, as otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
When you are driving with snow chains, it can
be beneficial to activate DTC briefly, refer to
page 89.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 238 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
239
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you do not know what repair procedures to fol-
low, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly,
there is a danger of subsequent damage and
related safety hazards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 239 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
240
Engine compartment
BMW X5
1Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 69
2Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 262
3Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 243
4Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 242
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 240 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
241
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
BMW X6
1Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 69
2Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 242
3Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 262
4Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 243
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level while driving or
when stopped on a level surface with the engine
running.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 241 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
242
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
>"Engine oil level OK"
>"Measuring engine oil level...":
This process can take approx. 3 minutes
when stopped on a level surface and
approx. 5 minutes while driving.
>"Engine oil level below minimum. Add
1quart!":
At the next opportunity, add 1 US quart/liter
of engine oil.
If the oil level displayed is below mini-
mum, add engine oil immediately.
Failure to do so may lead to engine dam-
age.<
>"Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked.":
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
>"Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mile-
age until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 74. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
BMW X5
BMW X6
Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corre-
sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into
contact with oil should be thoroughly washed
with soap and water.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to pre-
vent health risks.<
Oil change
Only have an oil change carried out by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines
and uses appropriately trained personnel.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 242 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
243
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be happy to answer more detailed
questions about approved oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<
Alternative oil grades
If none of the approved oils is available at a
given time, you can also use smaller quantities
of other oils between oil changes. The packag-
ing must include one of the following indica-
tions of oil specifications.
Gasoline engines
>Preferred: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-01 FE
>Alternative: BMW Longlife-98, API SM or
higher
Diesel engines
>BMW Longlife-04
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the SAE classi-
fications 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and
5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center can recommend
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instruc-
tions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the cool-
ant level is between the MIN and MAX
marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 243 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Maintenance
244
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system
The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete dealer service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 74:
>Engine oil
>Brake pads, front and rear separately
>Brake fluid
>Vehicle check
>Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required for
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-
vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 80, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 244 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
245
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located to the left on the driver's
side, on the underside of the instrument cluster
under a cover.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing an elevated
amount of exhaust emissions. Contin-
ued driving is possible. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce your speed and
proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center. Heavy engine misfiring causes
serious damage to the emission-relevant com-
ponents, especially the catalytic converter,
within a short time.
The warning lamp lights up if the fuel
cap has not been properly tightened
and the OBD system detects the
escape of fuel vapors. Check that the fuel cap is
correctly seated and tighten it until you hear a
clearly audible click.
Data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can
be transmitted or recorded to enable corre-
sponding services.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 245 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Care
246
Care
Car-care products
For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW
recommends using only products that BMW
has approved for this purpose.
Regular cleaning and care make a significant
contribution to retaining your BMW's value.
The BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to consult you on products and services
for the cleaning and care of your BMW.
Genuine BMW Care Products are materi-
als tested, laboratory tested, and tested in
actual use. They offer optimum care and pro-
tection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents; they can damage your vehi-
cle.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or pose health risks.
You should therefore heed the warnings and
hazard indications on the packaging. Open the
doors or windows on your vehicle whenever
cleaning the interior. Make sure there is suffi-
cient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only
products that are formulated for vehicle clean-
ing.<
Exterior care
Washing your vehicle
In the winter months, it is especially
important to ensure that the vehicle is
washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, signifi-
cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to
the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so
may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and
also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<
Car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes.
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the
following points:
>Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 269.
>If necessary, fold in exterior mirrors, refer to
page 52.
>Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm, otherwise there is dan-
ger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
>Deactivate rain sensor* to prevent
unwanted wiper activation.
>BMW X5: deactivate rear window wiper and
protect it from damage. Take appropriate
protective measures; inquiring with the car
wash operator as needed.
>Remove add-on parts such as spoilers or
phone antennas if they risk being damaged.
Before driving into the car wash, observe the
following so that the vehicle is able to roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with comfort access.
2. Shift into transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 62.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Mixed tires*
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
that the vehicle width is not too large for
the car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the
car wash could be damaged.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 246 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
247
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Steam cleaners/high-pressure
cleaning jets
When using steam cleaners or high-pres-
sure cleaning jets, make sure to maintain
a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum
temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or
temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or
can result in water penetration. Follow the oper-
ating instructions for the high-pressure clean-
ing jets.<
Do not spray the sensors and cameras,
e.g. of Park Distance Control, Top View,
or rear view camera, with high-pressure clean-
ers for long periods and keep the spray nozzle
at least 12 in/30 cm away from them.<
Hand washing
When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty
of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the
vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a
washing brush.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<
Follow local guidelines for washing vehi-
cles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or
strong solvents to clean the covers.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with plenty of
water.
Use a window de-icer to remove accumulated
ice and snow, not a scraper.
Windows
Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out-
side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur-
faces of the mirrors.
Do not use quartz-containing cleansers
to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<
Caring for the vehicle finish
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
Regionally occurring environmental factors can
affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore
important to tailor the frequency and extent of
your car care accordingly.
Immediately remove particularly aggressive
substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease,
brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; other-
wise, they may damage your paint.
Repairing paint damage
Repair stone damage or scratches imme-
diately, depending on the severity of the
damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<
BMW recommends having paint damage pro-
fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish
materials in accordance with factory guidelines.
Waxing
Sealant is required when water no longer beads
on the clean surface of the paint. Use only prod-
ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax
to seal your finish.
Rubber gaskets
Treat only with water or a rubber care product.
To avoid noise or damage, do not use
products that contain silicone to care for
rubber gaskets.<
Chrome components
Particularly after exposure to road salt, thor-
oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door
handles, or window frames with plenty of water
with shampoo added to it. For additional treat-
ment, use chrome polish.
Alloy wheels
Depending on your system, braking can gener-
ate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels.
Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel
cleaner.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 247 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Care
248
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and
do not use steam cleaners at temperatures
greater than 1407/606; otherwise you may
damage your vehicle.<
Aluminum running boards
A rust film on the aluminum running boards can
be removed with a special cleaning agent.
Outside sensors/cameras
Make sure that sensors and cameras out-
side the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance Con-
trol, Top View, or rear view camera, are kept
clean and free of ice in order to assure full func-
tionality.<
Interior care
Upholstery materials/cloth-covered
paneling
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order
to remove surface dirt.
In the event of more serious soiling such as bev-
erage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
microfiber cloth in combination with suitable
interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the
packaging.
Clean upholstery material over a large
area extending out to the seams. Avoid
intense friction.<
Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
items of clothing can cause damage to
the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro
fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather-covered paneling
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight patterns in the
grain are part of the typical properties of a natu-
ral leather.<
Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and
folds and result in considerable wear and cause
the leather surface to become prematurely brit-
tle. We therefore suggest that you clean the
leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at
regular intervals.
Particularly with light-colored leather, make
sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater
tendency to become soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year with a leather
lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective
layer of the leather.
Carpets/cargo bay
Floor carpets and floor mats can be vacuumed
or cleaned with interior cleaner when they are
more heavily soiled.
Floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When
inserting into place, make sure that the seat
rails do not protrude over the floor mats; other-
wise floor mats can be damaged.
Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc-
tion process and can be removed by repeated
vacuuming.
Plastic components inside
>Vinyl upholstery surfaces
>Lamp lenses
>Cover glass of instrument cluster
>Matt parts
should be cleaned with water and, if necessary,
solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Fine wooden components
Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim
panels and components. Follow up by drying
with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Soiled seatbelt straps hinder the reeling, thus
reducing safety.
Do not use chemical cleansers as they
can destroy the webbing.<
Inside sensors/cameras
Clean inside sensors and cameras, such as
those of the high-beam assistant, using a lint-
free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 248 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
249
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Displays
Clean displays like the radio or the instrument
cluster using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft,
nonabrasive lint-free cloth.
Avoid using excessive pressure when
cleaning displays; otherwise, you could
damage them.<
Never use chemical-based cleansers or
household scouring products. Keep all
liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise
surfaces or electrical components could be
attacked or damaged.<
CD/DVD-player
Do not use cleaning CDs; they can dam-
age parts of the player.<
Storing your vehicle
When storing your vehicle for longer than three
months, please seek the advice of your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 249 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
250
Replacing components
Onboard toolkit
The onboard toolkit is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.
Replacing wiper blades
Front
1. Fold down the wiper arm.
2. Swing the wiper blade upward.
3. Remove the wiper blade toward the wind-
shield, refer to arrow.
BMW X5: rear
1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A replacement bulb set is available from your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only replace bulbs when cool, as other-
wise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 250 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
251
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
When performing care and maintenance on the
headlamps, please observe the information on
page 247.
For bulbs for which replacement is not
described and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
BMW X5: changing lamps
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If a lamp
should nevertheless fail, you can continue driv-
ing cautiously with fog lamps* provided that
this is permitted by the country-specific laws.
Have work on the xenon light unit includ-
ing changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Halogen bulbs:
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replace-
ment.<
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Turn the bulbs to the left, pull off the con-
nector and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Unscrew bulb holder with bulb to the left,
refer to arrow, and replace.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps, rear
To replace, please go to a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Tail lamps
>Turn signals, brake lamps: 21-watt bulb,
P21W
>Backup lamps and brake force display: 16-
watt bulb, W16W
>Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 251 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
252
procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1Rear lamp
2Brake force display
3Turn signal
4Brake lamp/rear lamp/side marker lamp
5Backup lamp
6Brake lamp
Brake lamps
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.
4. Remove the upper bulb for replacement.
Apply gentle pressure to the lower bulb
while turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
5. Remount the side panel.
Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Remount the side panel.
Backup lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
4. Remove the bulb for replacement.
5. Remount the side panel.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 252 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
253
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Brake force display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo
bay lamp.
Then lay the cap on its upper side and close
it, refer to arrow.
6. Position the cargo bay lamp and clip it in,
refer to arrow.
License plate lamp
5-watt bulb, C11 12W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw-
driver, refer to arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
BMW X6: changing lamps
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If a lamp
should nevertheless fail, you can continue driv-
ing cautiously with fog lamps* provided that
this is permitted by the country-specific laws.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 253 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
254
Have work on the xenon light unit includ-
ing changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replace-
ment.<
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Left side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the right, refer to
arrow, and remove.
Right side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps
5-Watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
along with the bulb.
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the
socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Tail lamps
>Turn signals, backup lamps: 21-watt bulb,
H21W
>Brake lamps, brake force display: 21-watt
bulb, P21W
>Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 254 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
255
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1Brake force display/rear lamps
2Brake lamp/rear lamp
3Backup lamp
4Turn signal
Brake lamps
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Backup lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning trian-
gle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Brake force display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 255 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
256
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Replace the cover.
License plate lamp
5-Watt bulb, C5W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw-
driver, refer to arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. As a result, it is not necessary to
change the wheel immediately in the case of air
loss in the event of a breakdown.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
>With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 93
>With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure page 95
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires, page 237.
When mounting new tires, or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety. No spare tire is avail-
able in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise
you. Also refer to New wheels and tires,
page 237.
BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to
the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the
handling characteristics will be negatively
affected.<
Suitable tools for changing tires are avail-
able as accessories at your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Jacking points for vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located in the positions shown.
Compact wheel*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 256 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
257
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Set the parking brake and engage transmission
position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the imme-
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning
lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com-
pleting work.
The tools are located in the mount under the
floor panel flap.
1Vehicle jack*
2Vehicle jack crank*
3Lug wrench*
Removing compact wheel
The compact wheel is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.
1. Remove the tool mount.
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-
face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 257 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
258
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu-
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tight-
ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.<
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo bay.
The defective wheel cannot be stored
under the floor panel flap due to its
size.<
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve screw
caps against dirt and contamination.
Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of
gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 94.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Driving with compact wheel
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise,
changes in the driving characteristics could
result, for example reduced track stability on
braking, extended braking distance, and altered
self-steering characteristics in the limit range.
In conjunction with winter tires, these charac-
teristics are more pronounced.<
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to
their original size as quickly as possible. Failure
to do so is a safety risk.<
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be glad to advise in all matters concerning
the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 262.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of following
replacement at your BMW Sports Activity
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 258 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
259
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Vehicle Center or bring them to a collection
point. Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Always restrain the
battery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary power failure, e.g. due to
a discharged battery, the use of some equip-
ment will be restricted, requiring its reinitializa-
tion. In the same way, individual settings are lost
and must be updated again:
>Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 45.
>Time and Date
The values must be updated again, refer to
pages 79, 80.
>Radio
Radio stations must be stored again, refer
to page 164.
>Navigation system
You must wait until the system becomes
functional again, refer to page 157.
>Glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
It may only be possible to raise the glass
sunroof/panorama glass sunroof The sys-
tem must be initialized, refer to page 42.
>Digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 118.
>Active steering
The system automatically initializes for a
short time as you drive. During this time, the
system is deactivated, refer to page 97.
>xDrive
The system automatically initializes as you
drive. During this time, indicator lamps light
up. If the lamps do not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Before removing the vehicle from stor-
age, consult your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
A pair of plastic tweezers and instructions for
fuse allocation is stored with the fuses in the
cargo bay.
Spare fuses can be obtained from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle.
In interior
The fuses are located in the front passenger
footwell on the underside of the instrument
cluster.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell
trim panel.
2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Unscrew the screw, arrow 1, and fold down
the fuse carrier, arrow 2.
4. Replace the fuse concerned.
5. Installation is carried out in the reverse
order of removal. Ensure correct and secure
attachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 259 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
260
In cargo bay
Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 260 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
261
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request
Conditions for an emergency request:
>Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency request
is still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.
>BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 215.
>Radio readiness is switched on.
>The BMW Assist system is logged in on a
wireless communications network.
>The emergency request system is opera-
ble.
When the contract of participation with BMW
Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center without having to visit a workshop. Once
the BMW Assist system has been deactivated,
emergency requests are not possible. The
BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a
new contract.
Initiating an emergency request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
When the emergency request is received at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes fur-
ther steps to help you. Even if you are unable to
answer, the BMW Assist Response Center can
take further steps to help you under certain
conditions.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
Information for determining the required rescue
measures is transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if this can be determined.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist Response Center through the
hands-free system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the hands-free system is no
longer operational. The BMW Assist Response
Center may still be able to hear you, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency
request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. An automatic collision
notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency
request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the cargo bay.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 261 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
262
First-aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
The first-aid kit is stored in the cargo bay,
depending on the vehicle's equipment,
>on the right in a storage tray or
>behind the left side panel
Roadside Assistance*
The BMW Roadside Assistance offers you
assistance in the event of a breakdown around
the clock, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
With BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices, you
can contact BMW Roadside Assistance directly
via iDrive to request assistance in the event of a
breakdown, refer to page 216.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
On your BMW the so-called starting-aid termi-
nal in the engine compartment acts as the bat-
tery positive terminal, also refer to the engine
compartment overview on page 240. The cover
cap is marked with +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-
aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a start-
ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 262 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
263
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car-
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the toolkit under the floor panel
flap in the cargo bay, refer to page 250.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi-
cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<
Access to screw thread
Cover panel on left and right side of bumper:
press on the arrow symbol on the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 59, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. When the engine
is stopped, there is no power assist. This then
requires increased effort for braking and steer-
ing. Active steering is deactivated and larger
steering wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 263 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
264
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Before towing, manually unlock the trans-
mission lock, refer to page 66; failure to
do so can result in damage to the transmis-
sion.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, observe the following:
>Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
>When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
With tow truck
Do not tow your BMW with the front or
rear axle raised individually; otherwise,
the wheels may lock and the transfer case may
be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported only on a flatbed
surface.
Tow-starting
The engine cannot be started by tow-starting.
Start the engine by jump starting it, refer to
page 262.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties elimi-
nated.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 264 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Mobility
265
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 265 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 266 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice activation
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
Reference
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 267 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technical data
268
Technical data
Engine data
BMW X5 X5 xDrive30i X5 xDrive48i X5 xDrive35d
Displacement cu in/cmμ182.8/2,996 292.9/4,799 182.6/2,993
No. of cylinders 6 8 6
Maximum output hp 260 350 265
at engine speed rpm 6,600 6,300 4,200
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 225/305 350/475 425/580
at engine speed rpm 2,750 3,400-3,800 1,750-2,250
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Displacement cu in/cmμ181.8/2,979 268.2/4,395
No. of cylinders 6 8
Maximum output hp 300 400
at engine speed rpm 5,800-6,250 5,500-6,400
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407 450/610
at engine speed rpm 1,400-5,000 1,750-4,500
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 268 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
269
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
BMW X5
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 269 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technical data
270
BMW X6
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
Height with roof rack*: 66.9 in/1,699 mm
With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 270 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
271
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
BMW X5 X5 xDrive30i X5 xDrive48i X5 xDrive35d
Approved gross vehicle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
6,327/2,870
6,008/2,725
6,537/2,965
6,173/2,800
6,614/3,000
6,294/2,855
Load
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
1,290/585
1,102/500
1,290/585
1,102/500
1,290/585
1,102/500
Approved front axle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
2,767/1,255
2,778/1,260
3,020/1,370
3,020/1,370
3,064/1,390
3,064/1,390
Approved rear axle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
3,803/1,725
3,395/1,540
3,869/1,755
3,395/1,540
3,858/1,750
3,395/1,540
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 6,085/2,760 6,294/2,855
Load lbs./kg 937/425 937/425
Approved front axle weight lbs./kg 2,910/1,320 3,175/1,440
Approved rear axle weight lbs./kg 3,241/1,470 3,219/1,460
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 25.6-59.7/
570-1,450
25.6-59.7/
570-1,450
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 271 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Technical data
272
Capacities
BMW X5 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 225
of that reserve
X5 xDrive30i, X5 xDrive35d
X5 xDrive48i
US gal/liters
US gal/liters
approx. 2.1/8
approx. 2.6/10
Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 For more details: page 69
BMW X6 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 225
of that reserve
X6 xDrive35i
X6 xDrive50i
US gal/liters
US gal/liters
approx. 2.1/8
approx. 3.2/12
Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 For more details: page 69
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 272 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
273
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands of voice activation
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Music collection
*
Function Command
Accessing a music collection {Music collection}
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Accessing settings {Settings}
Accessing the computer {Onboard info}
Accessing contacts*{Contacts}
Displaying the phone book*{Phonebook}
Accessing BMW Assist*{B M W Assist}
Retrieving home address*{Home address}
Selecting destination entry*{Enter address}
Function Command
Playing a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track ...} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD*{C D and D V D}
Displaying entertainment details in split screen*{Entertainment details}
Function Command
Displaying current playback {Current playback}
Accessing a music collection {Music collection}
Playing a music collection {Music collection on}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 273 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
274
External devices
Tone control
Radio
FM
AM
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Selecting a genre {Select genre}
Selecting an artist {Select artist}
Selecting an album {Select album}
Selecting a track {Select track}
Selecting track directly*{Track ...}
Starting playback {Start play}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Function Command
Selecting external devices {External devices}
AUX front {AUX front}
Function Command
Accessing tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Selecting the radio {Radio}
Selecting FM stations {F M}
Selecting manual search {Manual search}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
Function Command
Selecting AM stations {A M}
Selecting manual search {Manual search}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 274 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
275
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Satellite radio
Stored stations
Telephone
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Selecting the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Satellite radio channel ...} e.g. channel 2
Function Command
Selecting stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset ...} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying the phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Selecting destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Selecting destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Retrieving home address {Home address}
Selecting route criteria {Route preference}
Selecting route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 275 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
276
Map
Split screen settings*
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Accessing traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic scaling of the map*{Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen perspective {Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Split screen enlarged intersection zoom {Splitscreen Exit ramp view}
Highlighting split screen traffic info {Split screen, Traffic Info map}
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Trip list {Stored trips}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 276 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
277
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contacts
BMW Assist
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Accessing contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Accessing BMW Assist*{B M W Assist}
Accessing the Internet*{Internet}
Function Command
Accessing the computer {Onboard info}
Accessing the trip computer {Trip computer}
Accessing vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Accessing vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Selecting the settings {Settings}
Accessing options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Accessing time and date settings {Time and date}
Accessing language and unit settings {Language and units}
Accessing speed limit settings {Speed}
Activating lighting {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 277 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
278
Equipment
Function Command
Selecting the air conditioning {Climate}
Activating Head-Up Display*:{head up display}
Enabling rear control*{Allow rear control}
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 278 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
279
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
Accessories 5
Access to 3rd row seats 48
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 77
Activated-charcoal filter 112
Active seat 52
Active seat ventilation 51
Active steering 96
– malfunction 97
– warning lamp 97
Adaptive brake lamp, brake
force display 97
Adaptive Drive 91
Adaptive fixing system 124
Adaptive Head Light 103
Address for navigation,
entering 141,147
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 28
Adjusting opening
height 31,33
Adjusting temperature with
expanded-scope automatic
climate control 109
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 160
Adjusting thigh
support 44,45
Airbags 98
– sitting safely 43
– warning lamp 99
Air distribution
– automatic 108,113
– manual 110
Air recirculation 110
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 110
– recirculated-air mode 110
Air vents 107
– refer to Ventilation 111
Air vents of automatic climate
control 107
Air volume 109,113
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 225
Alarm system 34
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off alarm 34
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 35
– tilt alarm sensor 35
Albums of music
collection 180
Alloy wheels 247
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 238
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
AM, waveband 163
Antenna for mobile phone 202
Antifreeze
– coolant 243
– washer fluid 69
Antilock Brake System
ABS 88
Anti-theft system
– refer to Alarm system 34
– refer to Central locking
system 27
Approved axle weights, refer
to Weights 271
Approved engine oils 243
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 271
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 119
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 74
Ashtray
– front 120
– rear 120
Assist, refer to separate
operating instructions
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 88
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 110
Audio 160
– controls 160
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
Audio CDs, DVD system in
rear 193
Audio device, external 119
Automatic
– air distribution 108,113
– air volume 108,113
– headlamp control 102
– liftgate operation 31
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 54
Automatically switching high-
beams on and off, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic car washes 246
Automatic climate control
– automatic air
distribution 108,113
– in rear 112
– switching off 111,113
– ventilation in rear 111
– with 2-zone control 108
– with 4-zone control 112
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 279 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
280
Automatic climate control in
rear
– activating on Control
Display 112
– deactivating on Control
Display 112
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 30
Automatic curb monitor 53
Automatic garage door
opener 115
Automatic headlamps, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic Hold 61
– activating 62
– deactivating 62
– parking 62
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 102
– refer to Daytime driving
lamps 103
– refer to Interior lamps 106
– refer to Pathway lighting 103
Automatic low-beams, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 110
Automatic Service
Request 219
Automatic soft closing 30
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 65
– kick-down 65
– manually releasing
transmission lock 66
– tow-starting 264
– with comfort access 36
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 108,113
AUX-IN connection 119,183
Average fuel consumption 73
– setting units 80
Average speed, refer to
Computer 73
Avoiding highways for
navigation 150
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
Axle weights, refer to
Weights 271
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Backrests, refer to Seats 44
Backrest width adjustment 45
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 251,254
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 262
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone, refer to Snap-
in adapter 212
Bass, tone setting 160
Battery
– charging 258
– jump starting 262
– power failure 259
– refer to Vehicle battery 258
Battery disposal
– remote control with comfort
access 37
– vehicle battery 258
Battery for mobile phone 212
Battery replacement
– remote control for DVD
system in rear 189
– remote control with comfort
access 37
Being towed 263
Belts, refer to Safety belts 49
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Blower, refer to Air
volume 109,113
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 204
BMW Advanced Diesel 226
BMW Assist 215
– activating 217
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 244
BMW Search 217
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center 219
BMW TeleServices 216
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Brake assistant 88
Brake force display 97
Brake lamps
– brake force display 97
– replacing bulbs 251,254
Brake rotors 132
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
– brake assistant 88
– brake force display 97
– breaking-in 130
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 88
– electronic brake-force
distribution 88
– parking brake 61
– refer to Braking safely 132
– warning lamp 13
Brake system 130
– brake pads 130
– breaking-in 130
– disk brakes 132
Braking safely 132
Breakdown, Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 262
Breaking-in brake pads 130
Breaking-in rear axle
differential 130
Break-in period 130
Brightness
– of Control Display 80
– on Head-Up Display 100
Button for starting engine 59
Buttons on steering wheel 11
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 280 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
281
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
C
Calibrating driver's seat 50
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
Call
– accepting 205
– ending 205
– rejecting 205
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 206
Calling, refer to telephone
operating instructions
Camera
– refer to Rear view camera 86
– refer to Top View 84
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Capacities 272
Capacity of cargo bay 271
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 258
Care 246
– car-care products 246
– carpets 248
– car washes 246
– CD/DVD-player 249
– chrome components 247
– displays 249
– exterior 246
– fine wooden
components 248
– hand washing 247
– headlamps 247
– high-pressure cleaning
jets 247
– interior 248
– leather 248
– light-alloy wheels 247
– paint 247
– plastic components 248
– rubber gaskets 247
– running boards 248
– safety belts 248
– sensors and cameras 248
– upholstery materials and
cloth-covered paneling 248
– windows 247
Cargo
– refer to Loading 133
– securing 134
– securing with ski bag 126
Cargo area, refer to Cargo
bay 122
Cargo area cover, refer to Roll-
up cover 122
Cargo bay
– capacity 271
– emergency actuation, refer
to Manually opening or
closing 34
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 31
– expanding 124
– opening 33
– opening/closing, refer to
Liftgate 30,33
– opening/closing, refer to
Tailgate 33
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– opening with remote
control 28
Cargo bay cover, refer to Roll-
up cover 122
Caring for the vehicle
finish 247
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 119
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– refer to Telephone 202
Car radio, refer to Radio 163
Car wash 246
– before driving in 60
– with comfort access 37
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 131
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 88
CBS Condition Based
Service 244
CD
– audio playback 172
– refer to Playing audio tracks,
DVD system in rear 193
CD-/DVD player in rear 188
CD changer 171
– controls 160
– fast forward/reverse 173
– random play sequence 172
– selecting a track 172
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
CD player 171
– controls 160
– fast forward/reverse 173
– random play sequence 172
– selecting a track 172
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
Cell phone, refer to Mobile
phone
Center armrest
– front 119
– rear 122
Center brake lamp 253,256
Center console 14
Central locking system 27
– comfort access 35
– from inside vehicle 30
Changes, technical
– refer to For your own
safety 5
– refer to Parts and
accessories 5
Changing gears using shift
paddles 65
Changing language on
Control Display 81
Changing tires 237
Changing trips 149
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 80
Changing wheels 256
Check Control 77
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 229
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 281 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
282
Children, transporting 55
Child restraint devices 55
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child-safety locks 58
Child seats 55
Chime, refer to Check
Control 77
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 121
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 246
Clock 71
– 12h/24h mode 80
– setting time 79
Closing
– from inside 30
– using remote control 27
Closing fuel filler cap 224
Clothes hooks 119
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Comfort access 35
– observe in car wash 37
– replacing battery 37
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Comfort start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Compact wheel
– inflation pressure 231
– wheel change 256
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 119
Compass, digital 116
Computer 73
– displays in instrument
panel 73
– displays on Control
Display 74
Concierge service 216
Condition Based Service
CBS 244
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 121
Connecting headphones 188
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 73
Consumption indicator,
energy control 72
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 73
Contacts, creating 213
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 80
– switching on/off 19
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Controls DVD system in
rear 187
Convenience operation
– glass sunroof 28,29
– glass sunroof with comfort
access 36
– windows 28,29
– windows with comfort
access 36
– with comfort access 36
Coolant 243
– checking level 243
– temperature 72
Cooling, maximum 110
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 88
Country codes DVD 173
Country information from
BMW Online 157
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 106
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 119
Criteria for route 150
Cruise control 69
Cruising range 73
Cup holders 119
Current playback
– external devices 185
– of music collection 180
Customer Relations 218
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 268
D
Data 268
– capacities 272
– dimensions 269
– engine 268
– technical data 268
– weights 271
Data transfer 220
Date 71
– display format 80
– retrieving 71
– setting 80
Daytime driving lamps 103
Defrosting windows 109
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 109
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
Deleting a trip 149
Deleting special
destinations 146
Destination, entering by town/
city name 141
Destination address,
entering 141,147
Destination entry using BMW
Assist 145
Destination for navigation
– entering 141
– entering by voice 147
– entering via map 146
Destination guidance 150
– bypassing a route
section 151
– changing specified
route 150
– continuing 150
– starting 150
– voice instructions 152
– volume of voice
instructions 152
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 282 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
283
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Diesel exhaust fluid
– at low temperatures 226
– at minimum 226
– refilling yourself 227
Diesel particulate filter 131
Digital clock 71
Digital compass 116
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 164
Dimensions 269
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 67
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 152
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 152
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 143
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 268
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Displaying images 195
Displaying special
destinations 146
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 105
Displays, refer to Instrument
panel 12
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up
Display 100
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 37
– battery of the remote
control, DVD system in
rear 189
– vehicle battery 258
Distance, refer to
Computer 74
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 74
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 82
Door entry lighting 106
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Door lock 29
Door locking, confirmation
signals 28
Doors
– manual operation 29
– remote control 27
DOT Quality Grades 235
Downhill driving assistance,
refer to HDC 90
Draft-free ventilation 111
Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Driver's seat, calibrating 50
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 102
Driving on poor roads 135
Driving stability control
systems 88
Driving through water 132
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 130
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 110
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 110
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
– indicator lamp 13,89
DSC OFF, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control 88
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 89
– activating 89
– indicator lamp 89
DVD
– country codes 173
– settings 174
– video playback 173
DVD changer, refer to CD
changer 171
DVD menu 174
DVD player, refer to CD
player 171
DVD system in rear 187
– CD/DVD player 188
– connecting headphones 188
– controls 187
– displaying images from CD/
DVD 195
– DVD country codes 190
– external device 198
– information on CD/DVD
player 196
– playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD 193
– playing video from CD/
DVD 190
– remote control 188
– switching on/off 189
DVD video 173
Dynamic Performance
Control 90
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 88
Dynamic Traction, refer to
Dynamic Traction
Control 89
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 89
E
Easy entry/exit 54
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD/DVD player 160
Electrical malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– liftgate 31
– panorama glass sunroof 40
– parking brake 63
Electric seat 44
Electronic brake-force
distribution 88
Electronic oil level check 241
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 283 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
284
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– liftgate 31
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Emergency request 261
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 262
Engine
– breaking-in 130
– data 268
– oil temperature 72
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 72
– speed 268
– starting 60
– starting, with comfort
access 36
– switching off 60
Engine compartment 240
Engine coolant 243
Engine oil
– adding 242
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
– approved engine oil 243
– checking oil level 241
– electronic oil level check 241
– temperature 72
Engine oil temperature 72
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 268
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 72
Engine speed 268
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 60
Entering special destinations
by name 145
Entertainment sound output
on/off 160
Entry map for destination 146
Equalizer, tone setting 161
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Event Data Recorders 245
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 131
Extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile
phone 183
Exterior mirrors 52
– adjusting 52
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– automatic heating 52
– folding in and out 52
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
External audio device 119
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 263
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 77
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 49
– warning lamp 50
Fastest route for
navigation 150
Fast forward
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 77
Filler neck for washer fluid 69
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 262
First-aid kit 262
Fixing system, adaptive 124
Flashing during locking/
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 28
Flat tire
– changing wheels 256
– compact wheel 256
– Flat Tire Monitor 92
– run-flat tires 93,95,237
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 69
FM, waveband 163
Fog lamps 105
– indicator lamp 13,105
Folding display screen open/
closed, DVD system in
rear 187
Folding rear seat backrest 124
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 132
Footwell lamps 106
For your own safety 5
4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive 90
Free memory capacity, music
collection 181
Front airbags 98
Front passenger airbags 98
– deactivating 98
– refer to Exception of front
passenger seat 55
Front seat adjustment 44
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92
– false alarms 92
– indicating a flat tire 93
– initializing the system 93
– snow chains 238
– system limits 92
– warning lamp 93
Fuel 225
– capacity 272
– display 73
– high-quality brands 225
– quality 225
– saving 130
– specifications 225
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 284 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
285
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Fuel consumption display,
computer, average fuel
consumption 73
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Fuel filler door 224
– closing 224
– opening 224
– releasing manually 224
Fuses 259
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 225
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Gearshifts, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
General driving
notes 130,131
Glass sunroof
– convenience operation from
outside 29
– convenience operation with
comfort access 36
– remote control 28
Glass sunroof, electric 40
– moving manually 42
– opening, closing 41
– power interruption 42
– raising 41
Glove compartment 118
– lighting 118
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 140
Grills, refer to Ventilation 111
Grills of the automatic climate
control 107
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 271
Guided Tours 149
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 61
– Automatic Hold 61
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hand washing 247
Having diesel exhaust fluid
refilled 226
Hazard warning flashers 15
HDC Hill Descent Control 90
HD Radio 164
Head airbags 98
Headlamp control,
automatic 102
Headlamp flasher 67
Headlamps 102
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 67
– replacing bulbs 250
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 103
Head restraints 46
– sitting safely 43
Head-Up Display 100
Heated
– mirrors 52
– rear window 109
– seats 50,51
– steering wheel 54
Heating 107
– exterior mirrors 52
– interior 107
– rear window 109
– residual heat 110
– seats 50,51
– steering wheel 54
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 110
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 134
Height
– on Head-Up Display 100
– refer to Dimensions 269
Height adjustment
– seats 44
– steering wheel 53
High-beam assistant 104
High beams 67,104
– automatically switching on
and off, refer to High-beam
assistant 104
– headlamp flasher 67
– indicator lamp 13
High-pressure cleaning
jets 247
High water, refer to Driving
through water 132
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 150
Hill Descent Control HDC 90
Hills 132
Holder for cups 119
Homepage 4
Hood 239
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 131
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 88
Hydroplaning 132
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 164
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 71
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 71
Identification, tire 238
Identification mark, run-flat
tires 237
iDrive 16
– changing language 81
– changing settings 79
– changing units of measure
and display type 80
– controller 16
– controls 16
– main menu 17
– setting brightness 80
– setting date 80
– setting time 79
– status information 19
Ignition 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 285 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
286
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 59
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 59
Ignition lock 59
– starting engine with comfort
access 36
Importing special
destinations 146
Importing trips 149
Indicator/warning lamps 13
– active steering 97
– airbags 99
– DSC 13,89
– DTC 89
– fasten safety belt 50
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
– fog lamps 13
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 95
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 229
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 92
– refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 164
– refer to Power failure 259
– refer to Setting date 80
– refer to Setting time 79
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Installation location, mobile
phone 119
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 152
Instrument cluster
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument panel 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 105
Instrument lighting 105
Instrument panel 12
– refer to Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Interactive map 147
Interior lamps 106
– switching on with remote
control 28
Interior motion sensor 35
– switching off 35
Interior rearview mirror 53
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– compass 116
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 68
Intersection, entering,
navigation 142
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN connection 183
iPod, connecting, refer to
USB-audio interface 183
J
Jacking points 257
Joystick
– refer to iDrive 16
– refer to Selector lever,
selecting transmission
positions 64
Jump starting 262
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 35
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 35
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Keys 26
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Kick-down, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Knock control 225
L
Lamps
– refer to High-beam
assistant 104
– refer to Parking lamps/low
beams 102
Lamps and bulbs 250
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 134
Last destinations 144
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 56
Leather care 248
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 251
Length, refer to
Dimensions 269
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 253,256
Liftgate 30,33
– adjusting opening
height 31,33
– automatic operation 31
– closing 31,34
– locking and unlocking from
inside 30
– manually opening or
closing 34
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– opening manually 31
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 251
Lighter 121
Lighter socket 121
Lighting
– instruments 105
– lamps and bulbs 250
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 102
Light switch 102
Load 133
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 286 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
287
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Loading 133
– securing cargo 134
– stowing cargo 134
– vehicle 133
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 134
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 30
Locking
– from inside 30
– setting confirmation
signals 28
– using remote control 27
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 35
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 30
– setting confirmation
signals 28
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 35
Low beams 102
– automatic 102
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Low-sulfur diesel 225
Lug bolts 257
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 258
– wrench 257
Luggage compartment
capacity, refer to Cargo bay
capacity 271
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 135
Lumbar support 45
LW, waveband 163
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 238
Main menu, iDrive 17
Maintenance
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 244
– refer to Service
requirements 74
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 244
Maintenance system 244
Malfunction
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– liftgate 31
– panorama glass sunroof 40
– parking brake 63
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 77
Manual air distribution 110
Manually releasing
transmission lock 66
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Map display 152
Map for navigation
– changing scale 153
– entering destination 146
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Maximum cooling 110
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 238
– with compact wheel 258
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 208
Microfilter 112
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for telephone 14
– for voice activation
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 52
– automatic curb monitor 53
– exterior mirrors 52
– folding in and out 52
– heating 52
– interior rearview mirror 53
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 205
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 202
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 119
– operation via iDrive 205
– pairing 202
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– refer to Telephone 202
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring tire pressure, refer
to FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92
MP3 player, connecting
– refer to AUX-IN
connection 183
– refer to USB-audio
interface 183
Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher/high
beams 67
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 67
Music
– managing 181
– playing 179
– storing 178
Music collection 178
– backup 181
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 287 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
288
Music player
– connecting, refer to USB-
audio interface 183
Music player, connecting
– refer to AUX-IN
connection 183
Music search 179
My Info 208
N
Navigation data 140
Navigation destination
– entering manually 141
– home address 144
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 152
Navigation system 140
– address book 143
– bypassing a route
section 151
– continuing destination
guidance 150
– destination entry 141
– entering a destination by
voice 147
– entering a destination
manually 141
– questions about system 157
– route list 151
– selecting destination via
map 146
– selecting route criteria 150
– special destinations 144
– starting destination
guidance 150
– terminating destination
guidance 150
– trip planner 148
– voice instructions 152
– volume adjustment 152
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 46
New remote control 26
New wheels and tires 237
North-facing map 152
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 68
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 263
O
OBD socket 245
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 225
Odometer 71
Oil
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
– approved engine oils 243
– consumption, refer to
Checking engine oil
level 241
– level 241
– refilling, refer to Adding
engine oil 242
Oil change interval, refer to
Service requirements 74
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard toolkit 250
Opening and closing
– comfort access 35
– from inside 30
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– using remote control 27
– using the door lock 29
Opening liftgate 33
Operation on poor roads 135
Options, selecting for
navigation 150
Orientation menu, refer to
Main menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 268
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 110
Outside temperature
display 71
– changing unit of measure 80
Outside temperature
warning 71
Overview, radio control 160
P
Panic mode 28
Panorama glass sunroof 38
– moving manually 40
– power failure 40
– raising, opening, closing 39
Park Distance Control PDC 82
Parked-car ventilation 114
– preselecting activation
times 114
– switching on and off
directly 114
Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid
– refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 82
– refer to Rear view camera 86
Parking assistance
– refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 82
– refer to Top View 84
Parking brake 61
– Automatic Hold 61
– indicator lamp 13
– releasing manually 61
– releasing manually in case of
an electrical malfunction 63
– setting manually 61
Parking lamps 102
Parking with Automatic
Hold 62
Particulate filter, refer to
Diesel particulate filter 131
Parts and accessories 5
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 53
Pathway lighting 103
Paying attention to speed 238
PDC Park Distance Control 82
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 205
Phone numbers, dialing 206
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 41
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– power windows 38
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 262
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 288 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
289
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Playing videos, DVD system in
rear 190
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Postal code, entering for
navigation 142
Power failure 259
Power steering-wheel
adjustment 54
Power windows, refer to
Windows 37
Preglowing, refer to Diesel
engine 60
Preselecting activation times
of parked-car
ventilation 114
Pressure, tires 229
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 41
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– windows 38
R
Radio
– controls 160
– HD Radio 164
– satellite radio 166
– selecting waveband 163
– storing stations 164
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
– Weather band, refer to
Weather reports 165
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 59
Radio readiness 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
– with comfort access 36
Rain sensor 68
Reading lamps 106
Rear automatic climate
control
– air flow 113
– switching off 113
Rear entertainment, refer to
DVD system in rear 187
Rear fog lamps, indicator
lamp 13
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 251,254
– replacing bulbs 251,254
Rear seat backrest,
folding 124
Rear seats
– adjusting 48
– adjusting head restraints 48
– folding over backrest 124
– head restraint adjustment 48
– heating 51
Rear socket 121
Rear ventilation 111
– automatic climate control in
rear 112
– 3rd row seats 112
Rear view camera 86
– cleaning 88
– displays on Control
Display 87
– driver assistance
functions 86
– switching off 86
– switching on 86
Rearview mirror 52
Rear window
– heating 109
– replacing wiper blade 250
– windshield wiper 68,246
Rear window safety switch 38
Rear window wiper, replacing
wiper blade 250
Reception
– quality 164
– radio station 164
Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19
Recirculated-air mode 110
– air recirculation 110
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 110
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 44
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 251,254
Refueling 224
Releasing
– hood 239
– refer to Unlocking 36
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 73
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 74
Remote control 26
– comfort access 35
– garage door opener 115
– liftgate 28
– malfunction 29,37
– replacing battery 37
Remote control, DVD system
in rear 188
– battery replacement 189
Removing condensation on
the windows 109
Replacement fuses 259
Replacement of tires 237
– changing wheels 256
– new wheels and tires 237
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 250
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 237
Replacing wiper blades 250
Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating an emergency
request 261
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 162
Residual heat 110
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 289 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
290
Restraint systems
– for children 55
– refer to Safety belts 49
Retreaded tires 237
Reverse
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
Reverse gear, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Road map 152
Roadside Assistance 262
Roadside assistance 216
Roadside parking lamps 104
Roller blinds, refer to Roller
sun blinds 118
Roller sun blinds 118
Roll-up cover 122
roll-up cover 122
Roof load capacity 271
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 135
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 263
Rotary pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 150,151
– bypassing sections 151
– changing 150,151
– changing criteria 150
– displaying map view 152
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 151
– selecting 150
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 152
Route map, refer to Map
display 152
Route section, changing 151
Route selection 150
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 237
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 237
Run-flat tires 237
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 93,95
– flat tire 93,95
– new wheels and tires 237
– tire inflation
pressure 93,95,229
– tire replacement 237
S
Safety 5
Safety belts 49
– damage 50
– sitting safely 43
– warning lamp 50
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 98
– refer to Safety belts 49
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
– airbags 98
– driving stability control
systems 88
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
– safety belts 49
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 237
Satellite radio 166
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 263
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 166
Seat heating 50,51
Seats 44
– adjusting 44
– adjusting electrically 44
– adjusting manually 44
– backrest width 45
– heating 50,51
– in rear 48
– lumbar support 45
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
– 2nd row seats 48
– shoulder support 45
– sitting safely 43
– storing the setting 45
– thigh support 44,45
– 3rd row seats 49
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation and Seat
heating 51
2nd row seats 48
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 134
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 126
Selecting new scale for
navigation 153
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Selector lever lock, refer to
Reverse gear 65
Self-leveling suspension 92
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 262
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 244
Service interval indicator, refer
to Service requirements 74
Service Request 219
Service requirements 74
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 244
Service status 220
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 290 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
291
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 79
– clock, 12h/24h mode 80
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– DVD 174
– language 81
Settings for the map
display 153
Setting speed limit 78
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 114
Shifting, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Shift paddles 65
Short commands of voice
activation system 273
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 150
Shoulder support 45
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 172
– CD player 172
Side airbags 98
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 251
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 43
– with airbags 43
– with head restraint 43
– with safety belts 43
Ski bag 125
Slide show, refer to Displaying
images 195
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass sunroof,
electric 40
– refer to Panorama glass
sunroof 38
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 92
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 120
SMS 208
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 212
– use 202
Snow chains 238
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 245
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 121
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 30
Soot particle filter, refer to
Diesel particulate filter 131
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 261
Spare fuses 259
Spare remote control 26
Spare wheel
– refer to Changing
wheels 256
– refer to Compact wheel 256
Special destinations 144
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 243
Speed
– with compact wheel 258
– with winter tires 238
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 78
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 161
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 19
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 88
Start/Stop button 59
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 60
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 262
Starting assistant 92
Starting difficulties, jump
starting 262
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 92
State/province, for
navigation 141
Station selection, radio 163
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam cleaners 247
Steering wheel
– adjusting 53
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 45
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– easy entry/exit 54
– heating 54
– memory 45
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 96
Steptronic, refer to Sport
program and manual mode
M/S 65
Storage compartments 119
Storing a trip 148
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Storing tires 238
Storing vehicle 249
Storing your vehicle 249
Street, entering,
navigation 142
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 229
SVCD 173
SW, waveband 163
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching cooling function on
and off 110
Switching off engine 60
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 291 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
292
Switching on
– audio 160
– CD changer 160
– CD player 160
– radio 160
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 103
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
– status information 19
– traffic information with
navigation system 153
T
Tachometer 72
Tailgate 33
Tail lamps 251,254
– replacing bulbs 251,254
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 272
Target cursor for
navigation 146
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 268
Telephone 202
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Teleservice Diagnosis 217
Teleservice Help 217
TeleServices, activating 218
Temperature
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 109,113
– changing units of
measure 80
– refer to Coolant
temperature 72
Temperature display
– outside temperature 71
– setting units 80
– temperature warning 71
Temperature warning 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 69
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 253,256
3rd row seats 49
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 258
Tilt alarm sensor, switching
off 35
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 114
Tire inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Tire inflation pressures 229
– checking 229
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Tire Quality Grading 235
Tires
– age 235
– air loss 93,95
– breaking-in 130
– changing 237
– condition 236
– damage 236
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 256
– inflation pressure 229
– inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to FTM
Flat Tire Monitor 92
– new wheels and tires 237
– pressure loss 93,95
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
– replacing 256
– retreaded tires 237
– run-flat tires 237
– size 235
– tread 236
– wear indicators 236
– wheel/tire combination 237
– winter tires 238
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 153
Tone
– control 160
– middle setting 162
Tone on locking/unlocking 28
Tools, refer to Onboard
toolkit 250
Top 50 of music
collection 180
Top View 84
Torque
– engine 268
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 258
Tow fitting 263
Towing 263
Town/city, for navigation 141
Tow-starting 263,264
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
– resetting system 94
– system limits 94
– warning lamp 95
Track, selecting on CD 172
TRACTION, refer to DTC 89
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traction control, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traffic bulletins
– categories 155
– filtering 155
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 153
– in map display 155
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 153
– refer to Route, bypassing
sections 151
Traffic information for
navigation during
destination guidance 155
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manually releasing
transmission lock on
automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 292 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Reference
293
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transmission positions, refer
to Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 64
Transporting children
safely 55
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 134
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 236
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 71
Trip odometer 71
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 269
Turn signals 67
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 251,254
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 235
Units
– average fuel
consumption 80
– temperature 80
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 115
Universal remote control 115
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– liftgate 28
– setting behavior 28
– using remote control 27
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 35
Unlocking and locking doors
using remote control 27
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 35
Updating the navigation
data 140
USB audio interface 183
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 258
– refer to Replacing battery 37
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 258
VCD 173
Vehicle
– battery 258
– breaking-in 130
– loading 133
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 269
– parking 60
– storing 249
– weights 271
Vehicle care, refer to Care 246
Vehicle jack 257
– jacking points 257
Ventilation 111
– draft-free 111
– in the rear 111
– rear automatic climate
control 113
– 3rd row seats 112
– while stationary 114
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 107
Vents, refer to Ventilation 111
Video menu 174
Video playback 173
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 152
Voice activation system 22
– short commands 273
Voice instructions for
navigation system 152
– repeating 152
– switching on/off 152
– volume 152
Volume 160
– audio sources 160
– mobile phone 205
– voice instructions 152
Volume balance, tone
setting 161
Volume of warning tones 81
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Warning tone, volume 81
Warning triangle 261
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 244
Washer/wiper system 67
– rain sensor 68
– washer fluid 69
– windshield washer
nozzles 68
Washer fluid 69
– capacity of the reservoir 69
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 132
Water penetration 247
Waveband for radio 163
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 236
Weather reports 165
Website 4
Weights 271
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 237
Wheel/tire damage 236
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 269
Wheels and tires 229
Width, refer to
Dimensions 269
Windows 37
– convenience operation 28
– convenience operation from
outside 29
– convenience operation with
comfort access 36
– opening, closing 37
– pinch protection system 38
– safety switch 38
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 293 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
294
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 67
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 100
Windshield washer system
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 67
– windshield washer
nozzles 68
Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer/wiper system 67
– replacing wiper blades 250
Winter diesel 225
Winter tires 238
– storage 238
Word matching principle for
navigation 149
Working in the engine
compartment 239
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 250
X
xDrive 90
Xenon lamps 251,253
– bulb changing 251,253
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 294 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 295 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
296
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 296 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 297 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG
01 41 2 602 756 ue
*BL2602756004*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
ba8_e70ag.book Seite 298 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation menu